You are on page 1of 431

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis

V200R004

User Manual

Issue

01

Date

2007-04-30

Part Number

31017871

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For
any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2007. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Main Functions............................................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Version Update Release ...............................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 System Architecture ....................................................................................................................................1-4
1.5 Work Flow ...................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.6 Working Mode.............................................................................................................................................1-7
1.6.1 Client/Server Mode ...........................................................................................................................1-7
1.6.2 Local Mode .......................................................................................................................................1-7

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM ................................................................................2-1


2.1 Installation Requirements............................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Installation Preparation................................................................................................................................2-3
2.3.1 Checking the System Configuration..................................................................................................2-3
2.3.2 Checking Network Environment.......................................................................................................2-3
2.4 Installing the MS SQL Server......................................................................................................................2-6
2.4.1 Installation Preparation......................................................................................................................2-7
2.4.2 Installing the SQL Server 2000 .........................................................................................................2-7
2.5 Installing the MSDE ..................................................................................................................................2-25
2.6 Installing the GENEX Shared....................................................................................................................2-27
2.7 Installing the Nastar GSM .........................................................................................................................2-30
2.8 Notes on Upgrade......................................................................................................................................2-38

3 Project Management ..................................................................................................................3-1


3.1 Introduction to Project Management ...........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Managing a Project......................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.1 Creating a Project ..............................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.2 Opening a Project ..............................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.3 Switching to Another Project ............................................................................................................3-6
3.2.4 Modifying a Project...........................................................................................................................3-7
3.2.5 Deleting a Project ..............................................................................................................................3-7

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement ........................................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Importing the Data.......................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Importing Engineering Parameters....................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Importing Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................4-7
4.2 Exporting Data ..........................................................................................................................................4-13
4.2.1 Exporting Engineering Parameters..................................................................................................4-13
4.2.2 Exporting Configuration Parameters ...............................................................................................4-14
4.3 Maintaining the Data .................................................................................................................................4-17
4.3.1 Uploading Engineering Parameters .................................................................................................4-17
4.3.2 Downloading Engineering Parameters ............................................................................................4-20
4.3.3 Modifying Engineering Parameters.................................................................................................4-21
4.3.4 Comparing Engineering Parameters................................................................................................4-22
4.3.5 Backing Up and Restoring the Engineering Parameters..................................................................4-23
4.3.6 Downloading Configuration Data ...................................................................................................4-24
4.3.7 Displaying Configuration Parameters .............................................................................................4-25
4.3.8 Checking Parameters.......................................................................................................................4-25
4.4 Maintaining Network Elements.................................................................................................................4-31
4.4.1 Creating a Site .................................................................................................................................4-32
4.4.2 Editing a Site ...................................................................................................................................4-33
4.4.3 Moving a Site ..................................................................................................................................4-34
4.4.4 Deleting a Site .................................................................................................................................4-35
4.4.5 Deleting a Cell.................................................................................................................................4-36
4.5 Extracting Performance Data.....................................................................................................................4-36
4.6 Importing the Performance Data ...............................................................................................................4-37
4.6.1 Starting the SQL Server...................................................................................................................4-38
4.6.2 Preparing the Data File....................................................................................................................4-39
4.6.3 Using the TransData ........................................................................................................................4-39
4.7 Collecting Resource Statistics ...................................................................................................................4-60
4.8 User Management......................................................................................................................................4-62
4.8.1 Management of User Access Rights................................................................................................4-62
4.8.2 Management of User Log................................................................................................................4-64
4.9 Backing Up and Restoring the Data ..........................................................................................................4-66
4.9.1 Backing Up the Data .......................................................................................................................4-66
4.9.2 Restoring the Data...........................................................................................................................4-67

5 Network Optimization..............................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Analyzing Frequency...................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency....................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC.................................................................................................5-7
5.1.3 Checking Idle ARFCNS ....................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.4 Checking Spectrum efficiency ........................................................................................................5-10
5.1.5 Checking Co-HSN Co-MA .............................................................................................................5-12

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

5.1.6 Checking Frequency Optimization..................................................................................................5-13


5.1.7 Generating the Report of Checking Hopping Frequency ................................................................5-15
5.2 Analyzing Neighbor Relations ..................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.1 Introducing Neighbor Analysis .......................................................................................................5-17
5.2.2 Maintaining and Auto Planning the Neighbors Relation .................................................................5-18
5.2.3 Importing the Neighboring Cell Relation........................................................................................5-29
5.2.4 Importing Neighboring Cell Relation of the Standard Format ........................................................5-30
5.2.5 Exporting and Clearing Neighboring Cell Relation ........................................................................5-33
5.2.6 Comparing and Backing Up Data....................................................................................................5-35
5.3 Displaying on Map ....................................................................................................................................5-41
5.3.1 Finding a Cell ..................................................................................................................................5-41
5.3.2 Displaying a Location Area.............................................................................................................5-42
5.3.3 Displaying the GPRS Cells .............................................................................................................5-45
5.3.4 Displaying the BSC Coverage.........................................................................................................5-47
5.3.5 Displaying All Sites.........................................................................................................................5-49
5.3.6 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme.................................................................................5-50
5.3.7 Displaying a Reference Grid ...........................................................................................................5-53
5.3.8 Switching 900/1800 Layer ..............................................................................................................5-54
5.3.9 Switching to Configuration Neighboring Cells ...............................................................................5-56
5.3.10 Legend Window ............................................................................................................................5-57
5.3.11 Adding a Map Mark.......................................................................................................................5-58
5.3.12 Importing a Raster Image ..............................................................................................................5-59
5.3.13 Changing the Show Setting ...........................................................................................................5-62
5.3.14 Setting a Cell Label .......................................................................................................................5-65
5.3.15 Setting a Reference Grid ...............................................................................................................5-67
5.3.16 Setting Huawei Configuration Parameters ....................................................................................5-69
5.3.17 Setting Alcatel Configuration Parameters .....................................................................................5-71
5.3.18 Setting Siemens Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................5-71
5.3.19 Displaying Engineering Parameters on the Map ...........................................................................5-72
5.3.20 Controlling the Map by Mouse and Keyboard ..............................................................................5-74

6 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................6-1


6.1 Operations About Network Performance Alarms ........................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks ..............................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Checking and Handling Alarm Tasks ................................................................................................6-4
6.1.3 Creating an Alarm Task .....................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.4 Deleting an Alarm Task ...................................................................................................................6-10
6.1.5 Modifying an Alarm Task................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.1.6 Searching a History Alarm Task......................................................................................................6-13
6.1.7 Setting Conditions for Alarm Filtering............................................................................................6-15
6.2 Performance Alarm Task ...........................................................................................................................6-17
6.2.1 Standard Alarms ..............................................................................................................................6-17

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Contents

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
6.2.2 Optional Alarm................................................................................................................................6-19
6.2.3 Customizing an Alarm.....................................................................................................................6-30

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report .......................................................................7-1


7.1 Automatically Generating the Reports ........................................................................................................7-3
7.1.1 Report Template Wizard....................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Daily Report .............................................................................................................................................. 7-11
7.2.1 Generating the Daily Report............................................................................................................ 7-11
7.2.2 Introduction to the Daily Report......................................................................................................7-16
7.3 Weekly Report ...........................................................................................................................................7-19
7.3.1 Generating the Weekly Report ........................................................................................................7-19
7.3.2 Introduction to the Weekly Report ..................................................................................................7-23
7.4 Monthly Report .........................................................................................................................................7-27
7.4.1 Generating the Monthly Report.......................................................................................................7-27
7.4.2 Introduction to the Monthly Report.................................................................................................7-31
7.5 Measurement Report .................................................................................................................................7-33
7.5.1 Generating the Measurement Report...............................................................................................7-33
7.5.2 Introduction to the Measurement Report.........................................................................................7-36
7.6 Health Check Report .................................................................................................................................7-36
7.7 Network Quality Report ............................................................................................................................7-38
7.7.1 Introduction to the Network Quality Report....................................................................................7-38
7.7.2 Generating a Network Quality Check Report..................................................................................7-39
7.8 BSC Network Monitoring Report..............................................................................................................7-42
7.8.1 Introduction to the BSC Network Monitoring Report.....................................................................7-42
7.8.2 Generating the Engineer Report ......................................................................................................7-44
7.9 PCU Network Monitoring Report .............................................................................................................7-49
7.9.1 Introduction to the PCU Network Monitoring Report.....................................................................7-49
7.9.2 Generating the PCU Network Monitoring Report...........................................................................7-53
7.10 WRO Analysis Report .............................................................................................................................7-56
7.11 Enhanced Traffic Statistics ......................................................................................................................7-61
7.11.1 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics.......................................................................................7-61
7.11.2 Querying the Template of Traffic Statistics ...................................................................................7-63

8 Further Locating Network Problems......................................................................................8-1


8.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance ..................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Analyzing BSC-Level KPI ................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Analyzing the BSC Overall Performance..........................................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell ..........................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis ............................................................................8-5
8.1.5 Customizing the Cell Filter ...............................................................................................................8-6
8.1.6 Analyzing the TOPN Cells ................................................................................................................8-8
8.1.7 Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell..............................................................................8-10
8.1.8 Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells ........................................................................................................8-12

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

8.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs.....................................................................................................8-14


8.2.1 Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell (PS) ................................................................8-14
8.2.2 Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis (PS) ..................................................................8-14
8.2.3 Customizing the Cell Filter (PS) .....................................................................................................8-15
8.2.4 Analyzing TopN Cells (PS) .............................................................................................................8-15
8.2.5 Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)......................................................................8-15
8.2.6 Analyzing the Extra Bad Cell (PS)..................................................................................................8-15
8.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility................................................................................................................8-15
8.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance..................................................................................................8-17
8.5 Analyzing the Mobility Performance ........................................................................................................8-19
8.5.1 Analyzing the Intercell Handover....................................................................................................8-19
8.5.2 Analyzing the Outgoing Intercell Handover....................................................................................8-21
8.5.3 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors...............................................................................................8-21
8.5.4 Analyzing the Missing Neighbors ...................................................................................................8-21
8.5.5 Analyzing the Outgoing Intercell Handover (BSC6000).................................................................8-22
8.5.6 Analyzing the Redundant Neighboring Cells (BSC6000) ...............................................................8-22
8.5.7 Analyzing the Missing Neighboring Cells (BSC6000) ...................................................................8-22
8.6 Analyzing the Measurement Performance.................................................................................................8-22
8.6.1 Analyzing the Measurement Report ................................................................................................8-22
8.6.2 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance ........................................................................8-22
8.7 Analyzing the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio .........................................................................................8-23
8.7.1 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell.........................................................................................8-23
8.7.2 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells.......................................................................................................8-25
8.7.3 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells.........................................................................................................8-26
8.7.4 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours .......................................................................................8-26
8.8 Checking Parameters .................................................................................................................................8-26
8.9 Customizing the Analysis Settings ............................................................................................................8-26
8.9.1 Managing the Cell Groups ..............................................................................................................8-26
8.9.2 Setting the Common Period ............................................................................................................8-30
8.9.3 Synchronizing the Server ................................................................................................................8-31
8.10 Analyzing the Query Result.....................................................................................................................8-32
8.10.1 Drawing Instantly..........................................................................................................................8-33
8.10.2 Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File...................................................................................8-34
8.10.3 Querying the Traffic Statistics.......................................................................................................8-34
8.10.4 Printing the Query Results ............................................................................................................8-36
8.10.5 Controlling the Query Result Data ................................................................................................8-36
8.10.6 Summing Up the Selected Area.....................................................................................................8-37
8.10.7 Sorting the Results ........................................................................................................................8-37
8.10.8 Filtering the Query Results............................................................................................................8-38
8.10.9 Tiling the Window.........................................................................................................................8-39
8.10.10 Creating a Cell Group..................................................................................................................8-40
8.10.11 Setting the Outgoing Inter-Cell Display ......................................................................................8-41

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
8.10.12 Setting the Geographical Display for Traffic Statistics ...............................................................8-43

9 FAQ ...............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 SQL Server and the Stand-Alone Version ...................................................................................................9-3
9.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Nastar of Old Version........................................................................9-3
9.3 Obtaining the Data from the Old Version ....................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1 Using the Neighboring Cell Relation Data of Older Versions...........................................................9-4
9.3.2 Using Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................9-6
9.4 Problems Caused by Expired License .........................................................................................................9-9
9.5 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters...................................9-12
9.6 The Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify)....................................................................................................9-13
9.7 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighboring Cells ......................................................................................9-13
9.8 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations....................................9-14
9.9 From Tab File to Map File.........................................................................................................................9-16
9.10 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the New
Version?...........................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.11 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started after the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.2 Hard Dongle
Version?...........................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.12 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.22 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Nastar GSM Version
2.21? ................................................................................................................................................................9-18
9.13 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed? .....................................................................................9-18
9.14 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported? .................................................................................9-18
9.15 Why Cannot a Task be Run? ...................................................................................................................9-18
9.16 Language of Task Tree ............................................................................................................................9-19
9.17 Icon for Antenna Being Incorrect On the Map ........................................................................................9-19
9.18 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed?...........................................................9-19
9.19 Begin time and End time in the Network Monitoring Report .................................................................9-19
9.20 Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Network Monitoring Report .....................................9-20
9.21 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM ..................................................................9-20
9.22 Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Optimization Analysis.................................................9-22
9.23 What Problems Will Occur If the Project Parameters are not Consistent with the Configuration Parameters?
.........................................................................................................................................................................9-22
9.24 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is not Consistent with That of the Frequency Optimization
Check...............................................................................................................................................................9-22
9.25 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in Network Monitoring Report. .....................9-23

A Engineering Parameters......................................................................................................... A-1


B Shortcut Keys ............................................................................................................................B-1
C Abbreviations............................................................................................................................C-1

vi

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 System architecture of the Nastar GSM..........................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-2 Work flow of the Nastar GSM ........................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Local Area Connection Status dialog box .......................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-3 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties.............................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-4 Interface for installing the SQL Server 2000 ..................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-5 Install Components dialog box .......................................................................................................2-9
Figure 2-6 Setup dialog box .............................................................................................................................2-9
Figure 2-7 Welcome dialog box......................................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-8 Computer Name dialog box .......................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-9 Installation Selection dialog box...................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-10 User Information dialog box .......................................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-11 Software License Agreement dialog box.....................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-12 CD-Key dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-13 Installation Definition dialog box ...............................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-14 Instance Name dialog box...........................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-15 Setup Type dialog box.................................................................................................................2-18
Figure 2-16 Select Components dialog box....................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-17 Services Accounts dialog box .....................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-18 Authentication Mode dialog box.................................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-19 Collation Settings dialog box......................................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-20 Network Libraries dialog box .....................................................................................................2-22
Figure 2-21 Start Copying Files dialog box....................................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-22 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box............................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-23 Copying progress ........................................................................................................................2-24
Figure 2-24 Setup Complete dialog box .........................................................................................................2-25

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vii

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Figure 2-25 Installation Wizard for the MSDE 2000......................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-26 Installing the MSDE ...................................................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-27 Welcome dialog box....................................................................................................................2-27
Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog box....................................................................................................2-28
Figure 2-29 Setup Status dialog box...............................................................................................................2-29
Figure 2-30 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box..................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box..............................................2-31
Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog box....................................................................................................2-32
Figure 2-33 Customer Information dialog box ...............................................................................................2-33
Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog box.................................................................................................................2-34
Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box ....................................................................................2-35
Figure 2-36 Select Program Folder dialog box...............................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box...............................................................................................................2-37
Figure 2-38 Maintenance Complete dialog box..............................................................................................2-38
Figure 3-1 Login dialog box .............................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Project Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 New Project dialog box...................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 New project listed in the Project Setting dialog box .......................................................................3-4
Figure 3-5 Login dialog box .............................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6 Project menu ...................................................................................................................................3-6
Figure 4-1 Open dialog box..............................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Select Table dialog box ...................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-3 Import Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Confirm information dialog box .....................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-5 Information dialog box ...................................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-6 Import completely dialog box .........................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-7 Prompt for partial import of engineering parameters......................................................................4-6
Figure 4-8 Wait dialog box ...............................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-9 Browse for Folder dialog box .........................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-10 Prompt for importing Huawei configuration parameters ..............................................................4-9
Figure 4-11 Wait dialog box ...........................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-12 Total records information box .....................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-13 Wait dialog box ...........................................................................................................................4-10

viii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 4-14 Import Neb Config data dialog box ............................................................................................ 4-11
Figure 4-15 Neb Table dialog box .................................................................................................................. 4-11
Figure 4-16 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-17 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box .......................................................................4-13
Figure 4-18 Output dialog box .......................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-19 Exporting configuration parameters............................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-20 Configuration parameter table exported in .xls format ...............................................................4-15
Figure 4-21 Output PCU Config dialog box...................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-22 Configuration parameter exported in .xls format ........................................................................4-17
Figure 4-23 Backup Engineering Parameter dialog boxDownload selected.................................................4-18
Figure 4-24 Backup Engineering Parameter dialog boxUpload selected .....................................................4-19
Figure 4-25 Message displayed after you upload the engineering parameters ...............................................4-20
Figure 4-26 Message displayed after you download the engineering parameters ..........................................4-20
Figure 4-27 Shortcut menu of the selected cell ..............................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-28 Edit Parameters dialog box .........................................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-29 Engineering parameter comparison.............................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-30 Synchronization Report dialog box.............................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-31 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab of the Property pane .............................................................4-25
Figure 4-32 RNP Check Report Analysis .......................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-33 RNP Check dialog box................................................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-35 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab..........................................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-36 Parameter Rationality check report in an .xls file .......................................................................4-29
Figure 4-37 RNP Check Report Analysis .......................................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-38 RNP report ..................................................................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-39 Site Edit dialog box.....................................................................................................................4-32
Figure 4-40 Cell Information tab page of the Site Edit dialog box.................................................................4-33
Figure 4-41 Site Edit dialog box.....................................................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-42 Prompt confirming the BTS dragging operation.........................................................................4-35
Figure 4-43 Prompt confirming the BTS deletion operation ..........................................................................4-35
Figure 4-44 Prompt confirming the cell deletion operation............................................................................4-36
Figure 4-45 StatTrans window........................................................................................................................4-37
Figure 4-46 SQL Server Service Manager screen ..........................................................................................4-38

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

ix

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Figure 4-47 SQL Server on the taskbar ..........................................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-48 Login dialog box .........................................................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-49 TransData2.3 window .................................................................................................................4-41
Figure 4-50 Network Information dialog box.................................................................................................4-42
Figure 4-51 BSC Property dialog box ............................................................................................................4-43
Figure 4-52 Main interface of the Transdata ..................................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-53 BSC information .........................................................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-54 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-45
Figure 4-55 Tree list on the left panel.............................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-56 Shortcut menu of a NET .............................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-57 PCU Property dialog box ............................................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-58 Success load message .................................................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-59 Message dialog box.....................................................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-60 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-61 Dialog box about the incorrect path of configuration data..........................................................4-49
Figure 4-62 Shortcut menu of a PCU .............................................................................................................4-49
Figure 4-63 Message about successfully imported configuration data ...........................................................4-50
Figure 4-64 Import PCU Statistic Data option ...............................................................................................4-50
Figure 4-65 Dialog box about the incorrect path of PCU statistic data ..........................................................4-51
Figure 4-66 Message about successfully imported statistic data ....................................................................4-51
Figure 4-67 Del PCU on the shortcut menu ...................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-68 History Date dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-69 History PCU data ........................................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-70 Message displayed during task initialization ..............................................................................4-53
Figure 4-71 Message during task backup .......................................................................................................4-53
Figure 4-72 Message displayed during task recovery.....................................................................................4-54
Figure 4-73 Option dialog box .......................................................................................................................4-55
Figure 4-74 Tasks Information dialog box......................................................................................................4-56
Figure 4-75 BSC information .........................................................................................................................4-57
Figure 4-76 Problem hint dialog box..............................................................................................................4-58
Figure 4-77 History Data dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-58
Figure 4-78 BSC Upgrade dialog box ............................................................................................................4-59
Figure 4-79 Quit option on the shortcut menu................................................................................................4-60

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 4-80 QUIT dialog box .........................................................................................................................4-60


Figure 4-81 Resource Stat dialog box.............................................................................................................4-61
Figure 4-82 Collecting resource statistics.......................................................................................................4-62
Figure 4-83 Interface of the resource statistic result.......................................................................................4-62
Figure 4-84 User Management dialog box .....................................................................................................4-63
Figure 4-85 Set User Access Rights dialog box .............................................................................................4-64
Figure 4-86 User Log dialog box....................................................................................................................4-65
Figure 4-87 Data Backup option.....................................................................................................................4-66
Figure 4-88 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-66
Figure 4-89 Progress indicator for data backup..............................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-90 Data backup complete dialog box ...............................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-91 Data Restore option.....................................................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-92 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-68
Figure 4-93 Progress indicator for data restore...............................................................................................4-68
Figure 4-94 Data restore complete dialog box................................................................................................4-68
Figure 5-1 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu ......................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box ....................................................................5-3
Figure 5-3 Channel check dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-4 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu ...............................................................................5-4
Figure 5-5 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box ....................................................................5-4
Figure 5-6 ARFCN Check dialog box ..............................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-7 Check result of the adjacent channel...............................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-8 Legend dialog box...........................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-9 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu...................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-10 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box .....................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-11 Co-channel and co-BSIC cell check dialog box............................................................................5-8
Figure 5-12 Idle ARFCNS menu ......................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-13 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box .....................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-14 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box.......................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-15 Spectrum Utilization menu .........................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-16 Spectrum Utilization dialog box ................................................................................................. 5-11
Figure 5-17 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check......................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-18 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu ....................................................................................................5-12

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xi

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Figure 5-19 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box ............................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-20 Channel Check dialog box ..........................................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-21 ARFCN Display dialog box ........................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-22 Frequency Analysis menu ...........................................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-23 Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box .................................................................................5-16
Figure 5-24 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format...........................................................................5-17
Figure 5-25 Neighbor Analysis menu.............................................................................................................5-18
Figure 5-26 Neighbors relation effect figure ..................................................................................................5-19
Figure 5-27 Adding bidirectional neighbors...................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-28 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu .......................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-29 Unidirectional neighboring cell check result ..............................................................................5-22
Figure 5-30 Neighbor Auto Planning menu....................................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-31 Antenna Setting tab of the Neighbor Sector setting dialog box ..................................................5-23
Figure 5-32 Property Setting tab of the Neighbor Sector Setting dialog box .................................................5-24
Figure 5-33 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-34 Export Neighbor Planning Results menu ....................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-35 Adjacent cell relation table..........................................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-36 Import Neighbor Planning Results menu ....................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-37 Please choose upright adjacence relation file to import dialog box ............................................5-28
Figure 5-38 Select table dialog box ................................................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-39 Clear Planned Neighbors menu...................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-40 Confirmation box ........................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-41 Import Neighbor File menu.........................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-42 Neighbor Analysis menu.............................................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-43 Please choose level adjacence relation file to import dialog box................................................5-31
Figure 5-44 Please choose upright adjacence relation file import dialog box ................................................5-32
Figure 5-45 Export Neighbors menu ..............................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-46 Export Neighbors dialog box ......................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-47 Table of horizontal adjacent cells relation in .xls format ............................................................5-34
Figure 5-48 Table of vertical adjacent cells relation in .xls format.................................................................5-34
Figure 5-49 Clear Config Neighbors menu ....................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-50 Confirmation box ........................................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-51 Compare Engineering Parameters menu .....................................................................................5-36

xii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 5-52 Result of comparing engineering parameters..............................................................................5-37


Figure 5-53 Engineering Parameters tab ........................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-54 Neighbor Record tab ...................................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-55 Autoplan Neighbor Record tab ...................................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-56 Compare Planned Neighbor with Config menu ..........................................................................5-40
Figure 5-57 Result of comparing planned neighboring cell with configured neighboring cell ......................5-41
Figure 5-58 Search Cell(s) dialog box............................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-59 Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box .............................................................................5-43
Figure 5-60 Color Setting dialog box .............................................................................................................5-44
Figure 5-61 LAC Displayed on the map.........................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-62 Color Setting dialog box .............................................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-63 GPRS cells highlighted on the map ............................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-64 BSC Display Setting dialog box .................................................................................................5-47
Figure 5-65 Color Setting dialog box .............................................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-66 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map .......................................................................................5-49
Figure 5-67 All sites displayed on the map.....................................................................................................5-50
Figure 5-68 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu .................................................................5-51
Figure 5-69 Show Theme dialog box .............................................................................................................5-51
Figure 5-70 Result of the highlighted theme ..................................................................................................5-53
Figure 5-71 Display reference grid.................................................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-72 900 MHz layer ............................................................................................................................5-55
Figure 5-73 1800 MHz layer ..........................................................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-74 Legend window during network optimization analysis ..............................................................5-57
Figure 5-75 Legend window during adjacent channel checking ....................................................................5-57
Figure 5-76 Add Legend.................................................................................................................................5-58
Figure 5-77 Add Map Mark dialog box ..........................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-78 Map Mark dialog box..................................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-79 Open Raster Image dialog box....................................................................................................5-60
Figure 5-80 Raster Image dialog box .............................................................................................................5-61
Figure 5-81 Click image to add a point dialog box ........................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-82 Show Items Option dialog box....................................................................................................5-63
Figure 5-83 Case of a too large displaying area..............................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-84 Displaying the area range after being corrected..........................................................................5-65

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xiii

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Figure 5-85 Option dialog box .......................................................................................................................5-66
Figure 5-86 Result figure with the cell label ..................................................................................................5-67
Figure 5-87 Grid Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-68
Figure 5-88 Site View window with the reference grid ..................................................................................5-69
Figure 5-89 Config data show setting dialog box...........................................................................................5-70
Figure 5-90 Property window.........................................................................................................................5-71
Figure 5-91 Engineering Parameter Select dialog box ...................................................................................5-72
Figure 5-92 Color Config dialog box .............................................................................................................5-73
Figure 5-93 Render the map ...........................................................................................................................5-74
Figure 6-1 Starting an alarm task......................................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Suspending an Alarm Task..............................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Activating an alarm task..................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-4 Network Trend navigation pane ......................................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-5 Warn Operation dialog box .............................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-6 Filling in detailed information of the alarm task.............................................................................6-7
Figure 6-7 Creating an alarm task ....................................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-8 Alarm Template navigation pane.....................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-9 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-10 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-11 Deleting an alarm task................................................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6-12 Confirm dialog box about deleting an alarm task ....................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-13 Modifying an alarm task .............................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-14 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-15 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-16 History Alarm Search dialog box................................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-17 Alarm window.............................................................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-18 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu .......................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-19 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-20 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box.......................................6-18
Figure 6-21 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-22 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-23 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-24 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-22

xiv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 6-25 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell .............................................................................................6-23


Figure 6-26 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-27 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell ..................................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-28 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell..............................................................................6-26
Figure 6-29 Alarm of radio connected cell .....................................................................................................6-27
Figure 6-30 Alarm of successful handover cell ..............................................................................................6-28
Figure 6-31 Alarm of rank 1 cell ....................................................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-32 Alarm of average num of idle TCHs in Interfere band 5.............................................................6-30
Figure 7-1 Report customization template dialog box......................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 KPI Dialog box ...............................................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 TOP N dialog box ...........................................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-4 Overthreshold dialog box................................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-5 New List dialog box........................................................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-6 CHART dialog box .........................................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-7 WORST CELL dialog box............................................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-8 Daily Report Analysis option........................................................................................................ 7-11
Figure 7-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box ...........................................................................7-12
Figure 7-10 Advanced tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.....................................................................7-14
Figure 7-11 Cell Group dialog box.................................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-12 New Cell Group dialog box ........................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-13 Daily report .................................................................................................................................7-16
Figure 7-14 KPI sheet in the Daily Report .....................................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-15 VIC sheet of Daily Report ..........................................................................................................7-19
Figure 7-16 Weekly Report Analysis option...................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-17 Setting tab of the Weekly Report dialog box ..............................................................................7-21
Figure 7-18 Advanced tab of the Weekly Report dialog box..........................................................................7-22
Figure 7-19 Weekly report..............................................................................................................................7-23
Figure 7-20 KPI sheet of Weekly Report........................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-21 VIC sheet of Weekly Report .......................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-22 Monthly Report Analysis option .................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-23 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box.............................................................................7-28
Figure 7-24 Advance tab of the Monthly Report dialog box ..........................................................................7-30
Figure 7-25 Monthly report ............................................................................................................................7-31

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xv

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Figure 7-26 Measurement Report Analysis option .........................................................................................7-33
Figure 7-27 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box ..................................................................................7-34
Figure 7-28 CarrierAnalyReport.....................................................................................................................7-35
Figure 7-29 Network Health Check Report option.........................................................................................7-36
Figure 7-30 Health Check dialog box.............................................................................................................7-37
Figure 7-31 Network Healthy Report .............................................................................................................7-38
Figure 7-32 Network Quality Check Report option .......................................................................................7-40
Figure 7-33 Network Quality Check Report dialog box.................................................................................7-40
Figure 7-34 GSM Wireless Network Quality Report......................................................................................7-41
Figure 7-35 Network Monitor Report option..................................................................................................7-45
Figure 7-36 Network Monitor Report dialog box...........................................................................................7-46
Figure 7-37 Engineer Report of BSC .............................................................................................................7-48
Figure 7-38 Monitoring Report ......................................................................................................................7-49
Figure 7-39 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report......................................................7-50
Figure 7-40 PCU team leader monitoring report ............................................................................................7-52
Figure 7-41 Analysis Report menu .................................................................................................................7-53
Figure 7-42 PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box ..................................................................................7-54
Figure 7-43 Busy Hour Setting dialog box.....................................................................................................7-55
Figure 7-44 WRO Report Analysis option......................................................................................................7-56
Figure 7-45 WRO Report dialog box .............................................................................................................7-57
Figure 7-46 Query Object tab of the WRO Report dialog box .......................................................................7-59
Figure 7-47 WRO report.................................................................................................................................7-60
Figure 7-48 WRO report in OWC mode.........................................................................................................7-61
Figure 7-49 Report Output dialog box............................................................................................................7-62
Figure 7-50 Saving template...........................................................................................................................7-63
Figure 7-51 Report output ..............................................................................................................................7-64
Figure 8-1 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box................................................................................................8-2
Figure 8-2 Busy Time Modify dialog box ........................................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-3 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box ...............................................................................8-4
Figure 8-4 Busy Time Modify dialog box ........................................................................................................8-5
Figure 8-5 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box.................................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-6 Query Filter Condition dialog box ..................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-7 Busy Time Modify dialog box ........................................................................................................8-8

xvi

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 8-8 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box .......................................................................................................8-9


Figure 8-9 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................8-10
Figure 8-10 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-11 Busy Time Modify dialog box ....................................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-12 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box ............................................................................................8-13
Figure 8-13 Busy Time Modify dialog box ....................................................................................................8-14
Figure 8-14 Cell Access Analysis dialog box .................................................................................................8-16
Figure 8-15 Busy Time Modify dialog box ....................................................................................................8-17
Figure 8-16 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis dialog box..................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-17 Busy Time Modify dialog box ....................................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-18 Intercell Handover Analysis dialog box......................................................................................8-20
Figure 8-19 Busy Time Modify dialog box ....................................................................................................8-21
Figure 8-20 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box..................................................................................8-24
Figure 8-21 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box ..........................................................................................8-25
Figure 8-22 Cell Group dialog box.................................................................................................................8-27
Figure 8-23 New Cell Group dialog box ........................................................................................................8-27
Figure 8-24 Cell Group dialog box.................................................................................................................8-28
Figure 8-25 Cellgroup Edit dialog box ...........................................................................................................8-29
Figure 8-26 Cell Group dialog box.................................................................................................................8-30
Figure 8-27 Common Period Setting dialog box ............................................................................................8-30
Figure 8-28 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box....................................................................................8-31
Figure 8-29 Synchronization Report dialog box.............................................................................................8-32
Figure 8-30 Quick Draw Setting dialog box...................................................................................................8-33
Figure 8-31 Quick drawing.............................................................................................................................8-34
Figure 8-32 Shortcut menu on the table..........................................................................................................8-35
Figure 8-33 Shortcut menu on the site view ...................................................................................................8-36
Figure 8-34 Sum of a selected row .................................................................................................................8-37
Figure 8-35 Result sorting ..............................................................................................................................8-38
Figure 8-36 Filtering query results .................................................................................................................8-39
Figure 8-37 Stretching Window......................................................................................................................8-40
Figure 8-38 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu........................................................................................8-41
Figure 8-39 Outgoing Intercell Handover Analysis dialog box ......................................................................8-42
Figure 8-40 Outgoing Cell Index Setting dialog box......................................................................................8-43

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xvii

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Figure 8-41 Draw Selected Column on Map option.......................................................................................8-44
Figure 8-42 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box......................................................................8-44
Figure 8-43 Geographical display of traffic statistics .....................................................................................8-45
Figure 9-1 Export Neighbors option.................................................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-2 Export Neighbors dialog box ..........................................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Neighbor Analysis menu.................................................................................................................9-5
Figure 9-4 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ......................................................9-5
Figure 9-5 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box...................................................9-6
Figure 9-6 Output dialog box ...........................................................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-7 Open dialog box..............................................................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-8 Select Table dialog box ...................................................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-9 Import Setup dialog box..................................................................................................................9-9
Figure 9-10 License Error dialog box.............................................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-11 Open dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 9-11
Figure 9-12 Co-channel and adjacent channel check .....................................................................................9-14
Figure 9-13 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check .........................................................9-15
Figure 9-14 Site View.....................................................................................................................................9-16

xviii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Description of the two main modules and two tools provided by the Nastar GSM..........................1-5
Table 1-2 Description of the client and the server ............................................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Recommended configuration for the client.......................................................................................2-2
Table 2-2 Procedure for installing the Nastar GSM standalone edition............................................................2-2
Table 2-3 Procedure for installing the Nastar GSM server edition ...................................................................2-3
Table 2-4 Scenarios for choosing SQL Server version .....................................................................................2-7
Table 4-1 Necessary fields in the engineering parameter table.........................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Description of the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page .......................................................................4-28
Table 4-3 Description of the configuration parameter check report................................................................4-31
Table 4-4 Login dialog box.............................................................................................................................4-40
Table 4-5 Description of the elements in the Network Information dialog box..............................................4-42
Table 4-6 Description of the PCU Property dialog box ..................................................................................4-47
Table 4-7 Description of the shortcut menu of a PCU ....................................................................................4-49
Table 4-8 Functions of buttons in the Resource Stat dialog box.....................................................................4-61
Table 4-9 Options on the shortcut menu .........................................................................................................4-65
Table 5-1 Frequency bands supported by the Nastar GSM...............................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box ..............................................................................5-14
Table 5-3 Description of the Antenna Setting tab ...........................................................................................5-24
Table 5-4 Description of the Property Setting tab...........................................................................................5-24
Table 5-5 Recommended values for the smallest down-line receiving level ..................................................5-26
Table 5-6 Description of the result of comparing engineering parameters .....................................................5-37
Table 5-7 description of the Show Theme dialog box ....................................................................................5-52
Table 6-1 Checking alarm messages.................................................................................................................6-5
Table 7-1 Functions of the buttons....................................................................................................................7-5
Table 7-2 Settings and functions.......................................................................................................................7-9
Table 7-3 Descriptions of the Setting tab page ...............................................................................................7-12

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xix

Tables

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
Table 7-4 Descriptions on the Setting tab page...............................................................................................7-28
Table 7-5 Descriptions of the elements on the Time and Object Setting tab page ..........................................7-34
Table 7-6 Descriptions of Setting tab page in the Health Check dialog box...................................................7-37
Table 7-7 Descriptions of the elements in the Network Quality Check Report dialog box ............................7-41
Table 7-8 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report ........................................................................................7-42
Table 7-9 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report ...................................................................................7-43
Table 7-10 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report .................................................................................7-44
Table 7-11 Descriptions of the Network Monitor Report dialog box..............................................................7-46
Table 7-12 Sheets in Engineer Report.............................................................................................................7-51
Table 7-13 Sheets in Team Leader report........................................................................................................7-52
Table 7-14 Descriptions of the PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box.....................................................7-54
Table 7-15 Descriptions of the Parameter Setting tab in the WRO Report dialog box ...................................7-57
Table 9-1 Handover success rate.....................................................................................................................9-20
Table 9-2 Calculation formula of non-original ...............................................................................................9-23
Table A-1 Project parameters...........................................................................................................................A-1
Table B-1 Shortcut keys................................................................................................................................... B-1
Table C-1 Abbreviations .................................................................................................................................. C-1

xx

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document provides guides to get the contents, related version, intended audience, and
conventions of the GENEX Nastar GSM.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Version

GENEX Nastar GSM


Wireless Performance Data
Analysis

V200R004

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
z

Technical support engineer

Network planning and optimization personnel

Telecommunication Management personnel

Maintenance engineer

Organization
This document details the main functions, user interfaces, and basic operations of the GENEX
Nastar CDMA. The document is very useful for the freshman that is unfamiliar with the
system to understand the main functions and operate the functions of the system. Also, the
document is very convenient for the advanced users to read the needed contents.
This document consists of twenty-five chapters and one appendix and is organized as follows.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

About This Document

Chapter

Content

This chapter is an overview of the GENEX Nastar GSM,


introducing the main functions, system structure, work
flow, and work mode of the Nastar GSM.

Overview

2 Installation of the
GENEX Nastar GSM

This chapter describes the procedure for installing the


GENEX Nastar GSM.

Project Management

This chapter describes the concepts and operations involved


in the project management.

Data Mangement

This chapter describes the functions of the data


management.

Network Optimization

This chapter describes the functions related to the network


optimization. These functions include frequency analysis,
neighbor analysis, and geographic display.

6 Network Performance
Alarms

This chapter describes the operations related to the network


performance alarm and the definition of alarm tasks.

7 Generating the Network


Monitoring Report

This chapter describes how to generate various network


reports.

8 Further Locating
Network Problems

This chapter describes how to locate network problems.

This chapter explains the frequently-asked questions during


the network optimization using the Nastar GSM.

FAQ

Appendix

This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations in this


manual.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Symbol

About This Document

Description
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are


optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets


and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } *

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.

GUI Conventions
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

About This Document

Keyboard Operation
Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing


Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed
concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation
Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without


moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-04-30)


Initial field trial release.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM ....................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Main Functions..............................................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Version Update Release.................................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 System Architecture ......................................................................................................................................1-4
1.5 Work Flow.....................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.6 Working Mode...............................................................................................................................................1-7
1.6.1 Client/Server Mode..............................................................................................................................1-7
1.6.2 Local Mode ..........................................................................................................................................1-7

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figures
Figure 1-1 System architecture of the Nastar GSM............................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-2 Work flow of the Nastar GSM ..........................................................................................................1-6

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Description of the two main modules and two tools provided by the Nastar GSM............................1-5
Table 1-2 Description of the client and the server ..............................................................................................1-7

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

1 Overview

Overview

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

1.1 Introduction to the Nastar


GSM

Functions of the Nastar GSM.

1.2 Main Functions

Main functions that the Nastar GSM provides.

1.3 Version Update Release

New functions added in this version.

1.4 System Architecture

System architecture of the Nastar GSM.

1.5 Work Flow

The work flow of the Nastar GSM.

1.6 Working Mode

Two working modes provided by the Nastar GSM:


client/server mode and local mode.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

1 Overview

1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM


Developed independently by Huawei Technologies Co., LTD, the GENEX Nastar GSM, the
software for planning and optimization, is applicable to GSM BSS 900/1800 systems.
The Nastar GSM uses the performance data, configuration data, and engineering parameters
from the OMC-R to make a deep and comprehensive analysis on the GSM BSS network. In
addition to network planning and analysis reports, the Nastar GSM also provides geographical
and multi-view display.
The Nastar GSM has the following features:
z

Provides a common interface for performance data and configuration parameters.


Performance data and configuration data of different vendors can be imported into a
database through the common interface.

Dynamically imports Huawei base station controller (BSC) performance data and
simultaneously analyzes multiple BSCs.

Dynamically imports Huawei packet control unit (PCU) performance data and
simultaneously analyzes multiple PCUs.

Designed for commercial use, the Nastar GSM is intended for network maintenance engineers
and network optimization engineers. You can utilize all the functions provided by the Nastar
GSM only after you obtain the license.
For details about how to obtain a license, refer to section 9.4 "Problems Caused by Expired
License."

1.2 Main Functions


The Nastar GSM has an open platform structure. The system architecture is applicable to
customizable performance analysis tasks and network optimization tasks.
The main functions provided by the Nastar GSM can be classified into the following types:
z

Export and import

Analysis and display

Parameter management

Report output

Export and Import


The Nastar GSM provides the export and import function, which includes:
z

Importing static performance data


The performance file on the maintenance console is imported to the database.

1-2

Periodically importing static performance data

Dynamically importing BSC performance data

Importing BSC configuration data

Importing PCU performance data

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual
z

1 Overview

Importing and exporting PCU configuration data

Analysis and Display


The Nastar GSM provides the analysis and display function, which includes:
z

Displaying site view on a map

Deleting, adding, or moving site cells based on the geographical view

Collecting statistics on spectrum utilization and analyzing idle frequencies


The common frequency bands and E-GSM frequency bands are supported.

Checking co-frequency and co-BSIC

Analyzing neighboring cells

Measuring distances and azimuth angles

Displaying navigation panes and legends

Querying common performance analysis tasks

Customizing performance analysis tasks

Querying common network optimization tasks

Analyzing network optimization topics

Customizing network optimization tasks

Automatically executing tasks and reporting alarms

Displaying and analyzing equipment alarms in an associated manner

Importing and exporting tasks

Displaying varied task results and site views in an associated manner

Selecting cell clusters from the site view and performing reverse query of performance
data

Directly displaying performance data task results in any of the following ways:

In line, column, and pie charts

Simultaneous display of double Y-axis and multiple indicators

2D and 3D images

Exporting queried results to files in .xls format

Selecting object types, such as CELL or BSC

Monitoring routine network


The Nastar GSM generates daily reports, weekly reports, and monthly reports.

Parameter Management
The Nastar GSM provides the parameter management function, which includes:
z

Extending the field supported by engineer parameters

Displaying engineering parameters that support any field on a map

Backing up and downloading the engineering parameters from the server

Modifying the engineering parameters in batches

Obtaining the configuration data from the server

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-3

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

1 Overview

Report Output
The Nastar GSM provides the report output function, which includes:
z

Generating a network health report

Checking co-Mobile Allocation (Co-MA) and co-Hopping Sequence Number (Co-HSN)

Optimizing the RNP parameter checking function

Spectrum utilization check

Neighbor co-frequency and co-BSIC check

Too-distanced neighboring cell check

Too-less neighboring cell check

Generating a network quality monitoring report

Generating a network quality check report

1.3 Version Update Release


Based on the Nastar GSM V200R003, the current version is added with the following
functions:
z

Importing PCUs

Generating a PCU performance monitoring report

Downloading PCU parameters

Displaying PCU parameters

Importing the data of the BSC6000

Half-rate performance analysis

Checking hopping frequency

Importing original data from a manufacturer

Relocating performance data

Generating a report on the comparison between performance data measured before and
after relocation

RNP's checking on PCU

1.4 System Architecture


The Nastar GSM has two modules and two tools used for periodically importing the
performance data.
Table 1-1 describes the two main modules and two tools provided by the Nastar GSM.

1-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

1 Overview

Table 1-1 Description of the two main modules and two tools provided by the Nastar GSM
Module/Tool

Description

TransData (import module)

The TransData has the following functions:

Nastar (main module)

NaConvert (a tool for


dynamically converting the
performance data)

Importing performance data, BSC configuration data,


and PCU configuration data to the SQL Server database

Querying the results of performance data subscription

Displaying the information of current database

Backing up the information of current tasks

The Nastar provides the following functions:


z

Providing the client application

Customizing and querying performance tasks

Displaying the results of querying the performance data


on the map

Displaying site views, navigation panes, and legends.

Installed on the Huawei BSC BAM, the NaConvert


periodically obtains the latest performance data from the
BAM.
After segmenting the latest performance data, the
NaConvert transfers the data to the Nastar server through
FTP. Then the Transdata automatically imports the data to
the SQL Server database.

StatTrans (a tool for


extracting periodic
performance results)

From the original traffic statistic file, the StatTrans collects


traffic statistics of certain periods and generates a specific
result file. Then the Transdata imports the result files into
the SQL Server database.

The Nastar GSM is in client/server mode and uses the SQL Server as the database. The client
accesses the server through TCP/IP. Figure 1-1 shows the system architecture of the Nastar
GSM.
Figure 1-1 System architecture of the Nastar GSM

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

1 Overview

1.5 Work Flow


Figure 1-2 shows the work flow of the Nastar GSM.
Figure 1-2 Work flow of the Nastar GSM

OMC

The OMC
customizes the
task.

BAM

Nastar
server

Nastar
client

BAM

Nastar
server

Nastar
client

BAM

Nastar
server

Nastar
client

The BAM collects


performance
data.

The FTP stores


the performance
data that are
uploaded from the
BAM.

The NAConvert
segments the
performance
data
and uploads them
to the FTP.

The TaskWatcher
monitors the
generating
process of the
daily, weekly,
and monthly
reports. The
TaskWatcher also
monitors the
refresh process
of the
performance
alarms.

The TransData
imports the data
from the FTP to
the SQL Server.

SQL Server
allows the
Nastar to access
its data.

The Nastar GSM


client analyzes
the performance
data.

The Nastar GSM


server analyzes
the performance
data.

The reports
are generated.

1-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

1 Overview

1.6 Working Mode


The Nastar GSM uses the client/server system structure and provides the following working
modes:
z

Client/Server Mode

Local Mode

1.6.1 Client/Server Mode


A PC can act as a client or a server in the Nastar GSM. In addition, the same PC can act both
as the server and the client at the same time.
When different PCs act as client and server, two networking modes are available:
z

The client and the server are connected through TCP/IP.


This can be implemented in a simple LAN.

The client accesses the server through remote dialing or private lines.
In this way, the performance data can be obtained automatically or in a partial real-time
manner.

When the Nastar GSM works in client/server mode, you can use all the performance-related
analysis functions provided.
Table 1-2 describes the client and the server.
Table 1-2 Description of the client and the server
Item

Hardware
Requirements

Required
Database

Data in the
Database

Function

Client

Common PCs

MSDE

Project
parameters

Data access

Performance
analysis and network
optimization
analysis

Data access

Performance
analysis and network
optimization
analysis

Server

Server
(recommended)

Common PC

SQL Server

Performance
data

Configuration
data

1.6.2 Local Mode


Considering the requirements of the network optimization engineers for mobile office, the
Nastar GSM client can conduct network optimization analysis without being connected to the
SQL server. Alternatively, only the client application rather than the SQL Server is installed.
The mode without the presence of SQL Server is called the local mode.
When the Nastar GSM works in local mode, you can use the network planning or
optimization related functions provided. The performance-related functions, however, cannot

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-7

1 Overview

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

be used. The data required for the network optimization can be loaded from the server or be
imported in .xls format.

1-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM ................................................................................2-1
2.1 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Procedure....................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Installation Preparation .................................................................................................................................2-3
2.3.1 Checking the System Configuration ....................................................................................................2-3
2.3.2 Checking Network Environment..........................................................................................................2-3
2.4 Installing the MS SQL Server .......................................................................................................................2-6
2.4.1 Installation Preparation ........................................................................................................................2-7
2.4.2 Installing the SQL Server 2000............................................................................................................2-7
2.5 Installing the MSDE....................................................................................................................................2-25
2.6 Installing the GENEX Shared .....................................................................................................................2-27
2.7 Installing the Nastar GSM...........................................................................................................................2-30
2.8 Notes on Upgrade........................................................................................................................................2-38

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figures
Figure 2-1 Local Area Connection Status dialog box.........................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box ..................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-3 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties...............................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-4 Interface for installing the SQL Server 2000 ....................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-5 Install Components dialog box .........................................................................................................2-9
Figure 2-6 Setup dialog box ...............................................................................................................................2-9
Figure 2-7 Welcome dialog box .......................................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-8 Computer Name dialog box............................................................................................................ 2-11
Figure 2-9 Installation Selection dialog box.....................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-10 User Information dialog box.........................................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-11 Software License Agreement dialog box ......................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-12 CD-Key dialog box.......................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-13 Installation Definition dialog box .................................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-14 Instance Name dialog box.............................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-15 Setup Type dialog box ..................................................................................................................2-18
Figure 2-16 Select Components dialog box .....................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-17 Services Accounts dialog box .......................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-18 Authentication Mode dialog box...................................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-19 Collation Settings dialog box........................................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-20 Network Libraries dialog box .......................................................................................................2-22
Figure 2-21 Start Copying Files dialog box .....................................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-22 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box .............................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-23 Copying progress ..........................................................................................................................2-24
Figure 2-24 Setup Complete dialog box...........................................................................................................2-25
Figure 2-25 Installation Wizard for the MSDE 2000 .......................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-26 Installing the MSDE .....................................................................................................................2-26

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 2-27 Welcome dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-27


Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog box .....................................................................................................2-28
Figure 2-29 Setup Status dialog box.................................................................................................................2-29
Figure 2-30 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box ...................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box ...............................................2-31
Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog box .....................................................................................................2-32
Figure 2-33 Customer Information dialog box.................................................................................................2-33
Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog box ..................................................................................................................2-34
Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box ......................................................................................2-35
Figure 2-36 Select Program Folder dialog box.................................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box.................................................................................................................2-37
Figure 2-38 Maintenance Complete dialog box ...............................................................................................2-38

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Tables

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Tables
Table 2-1 Recommended configuration for the client ........................................................................................2-2
Table 2-2 Procedure for installing the Nastar GSM standalone edition..............................................................2-2
Table 2-3 Procedure for installing the Nastar GSM server edition .....................................................................2-3
Table 2-4 Scenarios for choosing SQL Server version .......................................................................................2-7

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

2.1 Installation Requirements

The requirements for a computer to install the GENEX


Nastar GSM.

2.2 Installation Procedure

The procedures for installing the standalone version and


the server version of the Nastar GSM.

2.3 Installation Preparation

The preparations for the installation.

2.4 Installing the MS SQL


Server

The procedure for installing the MS SQL Server.

2.5 Installing the MSDE

The procedures for installing the MSDE.

2.6 Installing the GENEX


Shared

The procedures for installing the GENEX shared.

2.7 Installing the Nastar GSM

The procedure for installing the Nastar GSM.

2.8 Notes on Upgrade

The items that you must take care of during an upgrade.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

2.1 Installation Requirements


Table 2-1 lists the recommended configuration for the client of the GENEX Nastar GSM.
Table 2-1 Recommended configuration for the client
Item

Recommended Configuration

CPU

Pentium IV/2.8 GHz or faster

Memory

512 MB

Hard disk

80 GB

Accessory

CD-ROM drive/Network adaptor/17" LCD monitor

Operating system

Windows XP professional SP02 or higher

Application

Microsoft Office 2003

2.2 Installation Procedure


You can install the standalone edition or the server edition of the Nastar GSM. The Microsoft
SQL-Serve Desktop Engine (MSDE) and the SQL Server are required for standalone edition
and the server edition respectively.
Scenarios for standalone edition and server edition are as follows:
z

The standalone edition is recommended if the network environment is not available.


If only the MSDE is installed, the system overhead is reduced. The standalone edition
can only collect the statistics on static performance data.

If the network environment is available, Huawei recommends that the server edition of
the Nastar GSM and the SQL Server 2000 database should be installed.
The server edition has the following functions:

Collecting real-time performance data

Monitoring in real time

Automatically displaying the reports

Table 2-2 lists the procedure for installing the Nastar GSM standalone edition.
Table 2-2 Procedure for installing the Nastar GSM standalone edition

2-2

No.

Procedure

Refer to

Installation Preparation

2.3 Installation Preparation

Installing the MSDE

2.5 Installing the MSDE

Installing the GENEX Shared

2.6 Installing the GENEX Shared

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

No.

Procedure

Refer to

Installing the Nastar GSM

2.7 Installing the Nastar GSM

Table 2-3 lists the procedure for installing the Nastar GSM server edition.
Table 2-3 Procedure for installing the Nastar GSM server edition
No.

Procedure

Refer to

Installation Preparation

2.3 Installation Preparation

Installing the SQL Server

2.4 Installing the MS SQL Server

Installing the GENEX Sheared

2.6 Installing the GENEX Shared

Installing the Nastar GSM

2.7 Installing the Nastar GSM

2.3 Installation Preparation


2.3.1 Checking the System Configuration
Before installing the Nastar GSM, check whether the Microsoft Office 2003, especially the
Microsoft Excel, is installed on the client. If the Microsoft Office 2003 is not installed on the
client, install the Microsoft Office 2003 before you install the Nastar GSM.
The GENEX Nastar GSM needs to use some components of the Microsoft Office 2003 Excel.

2.3.2 Checking Network Environment


Before installing the Nastar GSM, you need to check the network environment and set the IP
address for the client based on the network segments provided by the operator.

Before setting the IP address for the client, keep contact with the O&M personnel of the
operator if you are not familiar with the network segments. Ensure that the IP address to be
specified is unique in the network segments. Otherwise, an IP conflict may occur.
To check network environment, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel.
Step 2 Double-click Network Connections.
Step 3 Double-click Local Area Connection.
The Local Area Connection Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-3

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-1 Local Area Connection Status dialog box

Step 4 Click Properties.


The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.

2-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box

Step 5 On the General tab page, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-5

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-3 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

Step 6 Set an IP address.


The set IP address and the IP addresses of the BSC and the BAM must belong to the same
network segment.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End

2.4 Installing the MS SQL Server


Take the installation of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition as an example.
This section introduces the installation of the SQL SERVER. For more details, refer to the
online help document of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000.
You can choose the edition of the Nastar GSM to be installed based on the actual
requirements.

2-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Table 2-4 Scenarios for choosing SQL Server version


Operating System

SQL Server

Windows XP

SQL Server Standalone Edition

Windows 2000

SQL Server Standard Edition

This manual takes the installation of Microsoft SQL Server 2000 English version as an
example to illustrate how to install the MS SQL Server.

2.4.1 Installation Preparation


Before running the installation program of SQL Server 2000, ensure that:
z

You have logged in to the operating system using the user account that has the local
management privilege. Alternatively, you have logged in to the operating system after
the system authorizes domain users with management privileges.

Ensure that all of the SQL Server related services, including the services using the
ODBC, are closed.

Ensure that the Regedit.exe or Regedt32.exe is closed.

Ensure that the Microsoft Internet Explorer of version 5.0 or higher is installed.

2.4.2 Installing the SQL Server 2000


To install the SQL Server, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Run the installation program of MS SQL Server 2000.
Two ways are available:
z

Run the installation program on the SQL Server 2000 CD.

Run the Autorun.exe in the directory of SQL Server 2000.

An interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-4.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-7

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-4 Interface for installing the SQL Server 2000

Step 2 Click SQL Server 2000 Components.


The Install Components interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-5.

2-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-5 Install Components dialog box

Step 3 Click Install Database Server.


The Setup dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Setup dialog box

After the InstallShield Wizard is prepared, the Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-7.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-9

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-7 Welcome dialog box

Step 4 Click Next.


The Computer Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-8.

2-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-8 Computer Name dialog box

Step 5 Select Local Computer.


The Installation Selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-11

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-9 Installation Selection dialog box

Step 6 Select Create a new instance of SQL Server, or install Client Tools.
Step 7 Click Next.
The User Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-10.

2-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-10 User Information dialog box

Step 8 Enter the names of the user and the company, and then click Next.
The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-11.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-13

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-11 Software License Agreement dialog box

Step 9 Click Yes.


The CD-Key dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-12.

2-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-12 CD-Key dialog box

Step 10 Enter the correct CD-Key. Click Next.


The Installation Definition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-13.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-15

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-13 Installation Definition dialog box

Step 11 Select Server and Client Tools, and then click Next.
The Instance Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-14.

2-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-14 Instance Name dialog box

Step 12 Select Default, and then click Next.


The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-15.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-17

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-15 Setup Type dialog box

Step 13 Select Custom, because you need to customize some special configurations for the BAM
operation and maintenance software.
Step 14 Click Browse in the Destination Folder area to set the destination path of program files and
data files to D:\Program Files\MsSql, and then click Next.
The Select Components dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-16.

2-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-16 Select Components dialog box

Step 15 Keep the default settings unchanged, and then click Next.
The Services Accounts dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Services Accounts dialog box

Step 16 Select Use the same account for each service. Auto start SQL Server Service.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-19

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Step 17 Select Use the Local System account in the Service Settings group box.
Step 18 Click Next.
The Authentication Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18 Authentication Mode dialog box

Step 19 Select Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication). Enter the
password of sa.
Remember the password of sa, for you need to pass the password authentication when you
use the sa account to connect the PC to the SQL Server.
Step 20 Click Next.
The Collation Settings dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-19.

2-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-19 Collation Settings dialog box

The order should be correctly selected. Otherwise, the BAM server cannot run normally.
Step 21 Select Collation designator and select Chinese_PRC from the drop-down list.
Step 22 Select Binary in the Sort order field.
Step 23 Click Next.
The Network Libraries dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-20.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-21

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-20 Network Libraries dialog box

Step 24 Select Name Pipes and TCP/IP Sockets.


The default value of Name Pipes is \\.\pipe\sql\query, and the default value of Port number
is 1433.
Step 25 Click Next.
The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-21.

2-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-21 Start Copying Files dialog box

Step 26 Ensure that all the information is correct. Click Next.


The Choose Licensing Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-23

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Step 27 Select Per Seat for in the Licensing Mode group box, and then enter the number of devices.
Step 28 Click Continue.
The installation program starts to create directories and copy files. During the process of
copying files, the following items are displayed:
z

Installation progress

Available disk space

Available memory

Copying progress for a single file

The Copy Progress window is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-23.


Figure 2-23 Copying progress

When the installation is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-24.

2-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-24 Setup Complete dialog box

Step 29 Click Finish.


Step 30 Restart your computer.
The installation of the SQL Server 2000 is complete.
----End

2.5 Installing the MSDE


To install the MSDE, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click setup.exe.
The Installation Wizard for the MSDE 2000 is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-25.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-25

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-25 Installation Wizard for the MSDE 2000

Step 2 Click Next.


The system starts to install the MSDE, as shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Installing the MSDE

Step 3 After the installation is complete, click Finish.


----End

2-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

2.6 Installing the GENEX Shared

Before installing the GENEX Shared, ensure that the Microsoft Office 2003 is installed on the
operating system. If the Microsoft Office2003 is not installed on the operating system, the
license verification is doomed to fail.
To install the GENEX Shared, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Insert the hard license.
Step 2 Open the GENEX Shared. Double-click setup.exe.
The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 Welcome dialog box

Step 3 Click Next.


The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-28.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-27

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog box

Step 4 Click Yes.


The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-29.

2-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-29 Setup Status dialog box

After the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-30.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-29

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-30 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box

Step 5 Click Finish.


Step 6 Restart the computer.
----End

2.7 Installing the Nastar GSM


To install the Nastar GSM, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click setup.exe in the installation package.
The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-31.

2-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box

Step 2 Click Next.


The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-32.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-31

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog box

Step 3 Click Next.


The Customer Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-33.

2-32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-33 Customer Information dialog box

Step 4 Type the user information in the User Name and Company Name fields.
Step 5 Click Next.
The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-34.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-33

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog box

Step 6 Choose the setup type in the Setup Type dialog box, and then click Next.
The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-35.

2-34

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box

Step 7 Click Next.


The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-36.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-35

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 2-36 Select Program Folder dialog box

Step 8 Click Next.


The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-37.

2-36

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box

After the installation is complete, the Maintenance Complete dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-38.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-37

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-38 Maintenance Complete dialog box

Step 9 Click Finish.


If you install the Nastar GSM stand-alone edition, the path for a complete installation should consist of
Nastar GSM installation directory, GENEX Shared installation directory, and MSDE installation
directory.

----End

2.8 Notes on Upgrade


When upgrading the Nastar GSM, you do not need to re-install the GENEX Shared or the
MSDE if the version of the Nastar GSM to be installed is the same as the existing version.
If the version of the Nastar GSM to be installed is the same as the existing version, the
GENEX Shared should be uninstalled. Then, re-install the GENEX Shared and the Nastar
GSM.

2-38

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

2 Installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM

The configuration file setup.ini in the MSDE installation path has an item named INSTANCENAME.
The INSTANCENAME indicates an instance name of the MSDE and the instance is named GENEX by
default.
To re-install the MSDE, use either of the following ways:
z

You do not need to uninstall the existing MSDE instance. You, however, are required to specify a
different instance name, that is, to add a new SQL application instance.

If you want to use the same instance name, uninstall the server first.

The uninstall shield of the MSDE does not delete the instance file in the Microsoft SQL Server
installation path. You need to delete it manually before re-installation. Therefore, Huawei recommends
that the MSDE should not be uninstalled when you re-install the Nastar.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-39

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
3 Project Management ..................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Introduction to Project Management.............................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Managing a Project .......................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.1 Creating a Project.................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.2 Opening a Project.................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.3 Switching to Another Project ...............................................................................................................3-6
3.2.4 Modifying a Project .............................................................................................................................3-7
3.2.5 Deleting a Project.................................................................................................................................3-7

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figures
Figure 3-1 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Project Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 New Project dialog box ....................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 New project listed in the Project Setting dialog box.........................................................................3-4
Figure 3-5 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6 Project menu .....................................................................................................................................3-6

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

3 Project Management

Project Management

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

3.1 Introduction to Project


Management

The work mode of the Nastar.

3.2 Managing a Project

The operations involved in project management.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

3 Project Management

3.1 Introduction to Project Management


The Nastar GSM client side organizes and manages the data by project. A project defines the
available operations and operable data, and saves the operation results.
A project has the following features:
z

The management of a project involves different operations based on the working mode.
For details, refer to section 1.6 "Working Mode."

A project defines the global configurations, including the connection mode, server
address, the local network to be analyzed, and other information, such as start time, end
time, and busy time for traffic statistic analysis. The project also includes project
information and configuration information used in the network optimization analysis.

A project saves the results of network optimization. Each time you re-open the project,
you can continue the network optimization analysis based on the previous one.

The SQL Server stores the performance data and configuration data of one or multiple local
networks. A project on the client is responsible for a LAN on the server, while a LAN is
associated with several projects on the several clients. Each project is independent from
others.

3.2 Managing a Project


The client side program provides the project management functions, including creating a
project, configuring a project, and deleting a project.

3.2.1 Creating a Project


To create a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client application.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.

3-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

3 Project Management

Figure 3-1 Login dialog box

Step 2 Click Setting.


The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Project Setting dialog box

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-3

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

3 Project Management

The Project list on the left part lists all the existing projects. The right part shows the
configuration information of the selected project. The configuration information can be
modified.
Step 3 Click Add.
The New Project dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 New Project dialog box

Step 4 Enter a name for the new project, and then click OK.
The new project is listed in Project list, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 New project listed in the Project Setting dialog box

Step 5 Set the configuration information in the right part for the new project.
z

Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list.


If the Online is selected, the following configuration information should be set:

3-4

Name of the server to be connected

Name of the database

Name of the user that has logged in to the system

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual
z

3 Project Management

Import a map file. This operation is optional. To import a map file, click
the map file.

to select

Step 6 Click OK.


For details on the implication of each field in the dialog box, refer to 3.2.4 "Modifying a Project."

----End

3.2.2 Opening a Project


Before analyzing the performance data, open a project.
To open a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client application.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Login dialog box

Step 2 Select a project in the Project name drop-down list.


Step 3 Click OK.
The project is opened and the relevant information is displayed.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

3 Project Management

Each project is saved in \project in the folder where the Nastar client application is installed. You can
copy this path to another host installed with the Nastar GSM client application.
If the project selected is on another PC, you need to enter the user name and password. For a project on a
local PC, you need not enter the user name and password.

3.2.3 Switching to Another Project


To switch to another project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Open Project, as shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6 Project menu

The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.


Step 2 Select another project in the Project name drop-down list.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End

3-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

3 Project Management

3.2.4 Modifying a Project


To modify a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client application.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Step 2 Click Setting
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Step 3 Select a project from the Project list.
The right part shows the configuration information of the selected project.
Step 4 Set the configuration information for the new project.
If Online Mode is selected, you need to set the server name, the database name, the login user
name, and other configuration information.
Click the button on the right side of the Name field, and select servers from the existing server list. If
you do not know the name of the server, click the button on the right side of the Database field and
select a database from the database list.

Step 5 Modify the map.


Click the button on the right side of the Map file field to select a map set file that serves as the
background of the site view. The map set file has the extension .gst.
Step 6 After the modification, click OK or select other projects from the Project list.
The configuration information is saved.
----End

3.2.5 Deleting a Project


To delete a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client application.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Step 2 Click Setting
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Step 3 Select a project from the Project list.
Step 4 Click Delete.
The project is removed from the Project list.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-7

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
4 Data Mangement ........................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Importing the Data ........................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Importing Engineering Parameters ......................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Importing Configuration Parameters....................................................................................................4-7
4.2 Exporting Data ............................................................................................................................................4-13
4.2.1 Exporting Engineering Parameters ....................................................................................................4-13
4.2.2 Exporting Configuration Parameters..................................................................................................4-14
4.3 Maintaining the Data...................................................................................................................................4-17
4.3.1 Uploading Engineering Parameters....................................................................................................4-17
4.3.2 Downloading Engineering Parameters...............................................................................................4-20
4.3.3 Modifying Engineering Parameters ...................................................................................................4-21
4.3.4 Comparing Engineering Parameters ..................................................................................................4-22
4.3.5 Backing Up and Restoring the Engineering Parameters ....................................................................4-23
4.3.6 Downloading Configuration Data ......................................................................................................4-24
4.3.7 Displaying Configuration Parameters ................................................................................................4-25
4.3.8 Checking Parameters .........................................................................................................................4-25
4.4 Maintaining Network Elements...................................................................................................................4-31
4.4.1 Creating a Site....................................................................................................................................4-32
4.4.2 Editing a Site......................................................................................................................................4-33
4.4.3 Moving a Site.....................................................................................................................................4-34
4.4.4 Deleting a Site....................................................................................................................................4-35
4.4.5 Deleting a Cell ...................................................................................................................................4-36
4.5 Extracting Performance Data ......................................................................................................................4-36
4.6 Importing the Performance Data .................................................................................................................4-37
4.6.1 Starting the SQL Server .....................................................................................................................4-38
4.6.2 Preparing the Data File ......................................................................................................................4-39
4.6.3 Using the TransData...........................................................................................................................4-39
4.7 Collecting Resource Statistics .....................................................................................................................4-60
4.8 User Management .......................................................................................................................................4-62
4.8.1 Management of User Access Rights ..................................................................................................4-62
4.8.2 Management of User Log ..................................................................................................................4-64
4.9 Backing Up and Restoring the Data ............................................................................................................4-66

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
4.9.1 Backing Up the Data ..........................................................................................................................4-66
4.9.2 Restoring the Data..............................................................................................................................4-67

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figures
Figure 4-1 Open dialog box................................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Select Table dialog box.....................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-3 Import Setting dialog box .................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Confirm information dialog box .......................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-5 Information dialog box .....................................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-6 Import completely dialog box...........................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-7 Prompt for partial import of engineering parameters........................................................................4-6
Figure 4-8 Wait dialog box.................................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-9 Browse for Folder dialog box ...........................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-10 Prompt for importing Huawei configuration parameters ................................................................4-9
Figure 4-11 Wait dialog box .............................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-12 Total records information box.......................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-13 Wait dialog box.............................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-14 Import Neb Config data dialog box .............................................................................................. 4-11
Figure 4-15 Neb Table dialog box .................................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-16 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-17 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box .........................................................................4-13
Figure 4-18 Output dialog box .........................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-19 Exporting configuration parameters .............................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-20 Configuration parameter table exported in .xls format .................................................................4-15
Figure 4-21 Output PCU Config dialog box ....................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-22 Configuration parameter exported in .xls format..........................................................................4-17
Figure 4-23 Backup Engineering Parameter dialog boxDownload selected ..................................................4-18
Figure 4-24 Backup Engineering Parameter dialog boxUpload selected .......................................................4-19
Figure 4-25 Message displayed after you upload the engineering parameters .................................................4-20
Figure 4-26 Message displayed after you download the engineering parameters ............................................4-20

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 4-27 Shortcut menu of the selected cell ................................................................................................4-21


Figure 4-28 Edit Parameters dialog box ...........................................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-29 Engineering parameter comparison ..............................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-30 Synchronization Report dialog box ..............................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-31 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab of the Property pane ...............................................................4-25
Figure 4-32 RNP Check Report Analysis .........................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-33 RNP Check dialog box..................................................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-35 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab............................................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-36 Parameter Rationality check report in an .xls file .........................................................................4-29
Figure 4-37 RNP Check Report Analysis .........................................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-38 RNP report ....................................................................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-39 Site Edit dialog box ......................................................................................................................4-32
Figure 4-40 Cell Information tab page of the Site Edit dialog box ..................................................................4-33
Figure 4-41 Site Edit dialog box ......................................................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-42 Prompt confirming the BTS dragging operation...........................................................................4-35
Figure 4-43 Prompt confirming the BTS deletion operation............................................................................4-35
Figure 4-44 Prompt confirming the cell deletion operation .............................................................................4-36
Figure 4-45 StatTrans window .........................................................................................................................4-37
Figure 4-46 SQL Server Service Manager screen ............................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-47 SQL Server on the taskbar ............................................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-48 Login dialog box...........................................................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-49 TransData2.3 window ...................................................................................................................4-41
Figure 4-50 Network Information dialog box ..................................................................................................4-42
Figure 4-51 BSC Property dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-43
Figure 4-52 Main interface of the Transdata ....................................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-53 BSC information...........................................................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-54 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-45
Figure 4-55 Tree list on the left panel...............................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-56 Shortcut menu of a NET ...............................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-57 PCU Property dialog box..............................................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-58 Success load message ...................................................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-59 Message dialog box ......................................................................................................................4-48

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 4-60 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-48


Figure 4-61 Dialog box about the incorrect path of configuration data............................................................4-49
Figure 4-62 Shortcut menu of a PCU ...............................................................................................................4-49
Figure 4-63 Message about successfully imported configuration data.............................................................4-50
Figure 4-64 Import PCU Statistic Data option .................................................................................................4-50
Figure 4-65 Dialog box about the incorrect path of PCU statistic data ............................................................4-51
Figure 4-66 Message about successfully imported statistic data ......................................................................4-51
Figure 4-67 Del PCU on the shortcut menu .....................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-68 History Date dialog box................................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-69 History PCU data..........................................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-70 Message displayed during task initialization ................................................................................4-53
Figure 4-71 Message during task backup .........................................................................................................4-53
Figure 4-72 Message displayed during task recovery ......................................................................................4-54
Figure 4-73 Option dialog box .........................................................................................................................4-55
Figure 4-74 Tasks Information dialog box .......................................................................................................4-56
Figure 4-75 BSC information...........................................................................................................................4-57
Figure 4-76 Problem hint dialog box................................................................................................................4-58
Figure 4-77 History Data dialog box................................................................................................................4-58
Figure 4-78 BSC Upgrade dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-59
Figure 4-79 Quit option on the shortcut menu..................................................................................................4-60
Figure 4-80 QUIT dialog box...........................................................................................................................4-60
Figure 4-81 Resource Stat dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-61
Figure 4-82 Collecting resource statistics ........................................................................................................4-62
Figure 4-83 Interface of the resource statistic result ........................................................................................4-62
Figure 4-84 User Management dialog box .......................................................................................................4-63
Figure 4-85 Set User Access Rights dialog box ...............................................................................................4-64
Figure 4-86 User Log dialog box .....................................................................................................................4-65
Figure 4-87 Data Backup option ......................................................................................................................4-66
Figure 4-88 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-66
Figure 4-89 Progress indicator for data backup................................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-90 Data backup complete dialog box.................................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-91 Data Restore option ......................................................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-92 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-68

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 4-93 Progress indicator for data restore ................................................................................................4-68


Figure 4-94 Data restore complete dialog box .................................................................................................4-68

vi

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Tables

Tables
Table 4-1 Necessary fields in the engineering parameter table...........................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Description of the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page .........................................................................4-28
Table 4-3 Description of the configuration parameter check report .................................................................4-31
Table 4-4 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................4-40
Table 4-5 Description of the elements in the Network Information dialog box................................................4-42
Table 4-6 Description of the PCU Property dialog box ....................................................................................4-47
Table 4-7 Description of the shortcut menu of a PCU......................................................................................4-49
Table 4-8 Functions of buttons in the Resource Stat dialog box.......................................................................4-61
Table 4-9 Options on the shortcut menu ...........................................................................................................4-65

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vii

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Data Mangement

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

4.1 Importing the Data

The procedure for importing project and configuration


parameters.

4.2 Exporting Data

The procedure for exporting project and configuration


parameters.

4.3 Maintaining the Data

The function of maintaining project and configuration


parameters.

4.4 Maintaining Network


Elements

The function of maintaining network elements.

4.5 Extracting Performance


Data

The procedure for extracting traffic statistic data.

4.6 Importing the Performance


Data

The procedure for importing traffic statistic data.

4.7 Collecting Resource


Statistics

The statistics on all the resources in the network. These


resources include BSC, BTS, cells, carriers, channel, and
boards.
The resource statistics collection function is used to
familiarize yourselves with the network configuration.

4.8 User Management

Functions involved in the user management.

4.9 Backing Up and Restoring


the Data

How to back up and restore the data.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.1 Importing the Data


This section includes the following two parts:
z

Importing engineering parameters


For details, refer to section 4.1.1 "Importing Engineering Parameters."

Importing configuration parameters


For details, refer to section 4.1.2 "Importing Configuration Parameters."

4.1.1 Importing Engineering Parameters


Requirements for Engineering Parameters
Table 4-1 lists the necessary fields in the engineering parameter table to be imported.
Table 4-1 Necessary fields in the engineering parameter table
Field Name

Full Match

Description

Cell name

The field is required to be displayed on the map.

Longitude

The longitude and latitude of the cell are required for


the system to dynamically draw cells and BTSs.
Without them, the site map cannot be drawn.

Latitude

The longitude and latitude of the cell are required for


the system to dynamically draw cells and BTSs.
Without them, the site map cannot be drawn.

Azimuth

The cell azimuth angle is required for the system to


draw the direction of a BTS sector.

LAC

During the import of engineering parameters, an LAC


can also be imported if the LAC is not matched.

If a cell does not contain the LAC field, the system


cannot check the LAC and fails to conduct the
network optimization.

During the import of engineering parameters, a CI


can also be imported if the CI is not matched.

If a cell does not contain the LAC field, the system


cannot check the CI and fails to conduct the network
optimization.

CI

Other fields

4-2

The other field can be matched based on the detailed


requirement, but it does not disturb the import of
engineering parameters. The information of this field is
unavailable during the network optimization.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

If the configuration data (the .dbf file) is imported or downloaded, the engineering parameters are
updated by mapping the configuration data into engineering parameters. Then the updated
engineering parameters are regarded as the benchmark.

If the configuration data is not imported or downloaded, the engineering parameters source data is
regarded as the benchmark.

Ensure that the engineering parameter table to be imported has no blanks. If blanks exist in the
engineering parameter table, the system regards the blank line as a faulty line, and will not import it.

After DBF is imported or downloaded, the Nastar GSM automatically updates the local engineering
parameters.

Importing Engineering Parameters


To import engineering parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Engineering Parameters.
The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Open dialog box

Step 2 Select the engineering parameter table file and click Open.
The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-3

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-2 Select Table dialog box

Step 3 Select the required sheets, and then click OK.


The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Import Setting dialog box

Step 4 Set the imported data.


The system automatically identifies and matches some fields based on the engineering
parameter table. For the unmatched or wrongly-matched fields, right-click the header in the
list box and choose the associated field on the shortcut menu.

4-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

During the import of the data, choose degree/minute/second or decimalization based on the data type
of the engineering parameters for the longitude and latitude.

Latitude: 0 to 90 degree in the northern hemisphere and 90 to 0 degree in the southern hemisphere.

Longitude: 0 to 180 degree in the eastern hemisphere and 180 to 0 degree in the western
hemisphere.

If you want to overwrite the content of previous site configuration database with the engineering
parameter table to be imported, ensure that Clear Database is selected in the dialog box.

Step 5 Click OK.


The confirm information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4 Confirm information dialog box

Step 6 Click OK.


z

If the engineering parameters are already imported, the Information dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Information dialog box

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement
z

If the engineering parameters to be imported do not exist and are imported successfully
this time, the Import completely dialog box is displayed, as show in Figure 4-6.
The Import completely dialog box lists the number of imported parameters.

Figure 4-6 Import completely dialog box

If the engineering parameters to be imported do not exist and are imported partially this
time, a prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Prompt for partial import of engineering parameters

Step 7 Click Yes to query the report on the fault. Alternatively, click No.
The Wait dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 Wait dialog box

----End

4-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.1.2 Importing Configuration Parameters


Requirements for Configuration Parameters
The requirements for configuration parameters are as follows:
z

Ensure that the engineering parameters are imported before you import configuration
parameters. The configuration parameters can be imported only when the cell
information of the project exists. Otherwise, all the configuration parameters fail to be
imported.

The cell LAC and CI in the configuration parameters must match those imported in the
engineering parameters earlier. That is, the cell configuration information can be
imported successfully only when the cells in the configuration data match those in the
opened project.

Requirements for Configuration Parameter Versions


The requirements for configuration parameter versions are as follows:
z

Huawei configuration data supports the following versions:

G3bsc32.10100.03.1120a

G3bsc32.10100.04.1120a

G 3bsc32.10100.06.1120a

G3bsc32.10101.04.1120a

G3bsc32.10101.06.1120a

G3bsc32.10102.06.1120a

G3BSC32V300R002C09

G3BSC32V300R002C10

G3BSC32V300R002C11

G3BSC32V300R002C12

G3BSC32V300R002C13

G3BSC32V300R006C01

Alcatel configuration data supports version BSC72

Siemens configuration data supports version BR6.0

Required Files for Configuration Parameters


The required files for configuration parameters are as follows:
z

Required files for Huawei configuration parameters


To successfully import Huawei configuration parameters, ensure that the following files
exist on the local PC:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

celldesc.dbf

symgdatl.dbf

rccfg.dbf

cellattr.dbf

bsccell.dbf

callctrl.dbf

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-7

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

cellcfg.dbf

swctrl.dbf

nebcell.dbf

nordata.dbf

clsdata.dbf

urgedat.dbf

pwrctls.dbf

freechpr.dbf

btspwrc.dbf

mspwrc.dbf

hw2pwrct.dbf

celcalmp.dbf

The configuration parameters can also be imported even when one of the files described previously does
not exist. The integrality of the Huawei configuration data, however, cannot be guaranteed.
z

Required files for Alcatel configuration parameters


To successfully import Alcatel configuration data, ensure that the following files exist on
the PC:

Cell.csv

RnlPowerControl.csv

HoControl.csv

Required files for Siemens configuration parameters


To successfully import Siemens configuration parameters, ensure that the .asc file is
correct.

Importing Huawei Configuration Parameters


To import Huawei configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Huawei.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-9.

4-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-9 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 2 Select the directory for Huawei configuration parameters (*.dbf), and then click OK to start
the import.
During the import, a prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 Prompt for importing Huawei configuration parameters

Choose whether to generate the initial table for the Huawei configuration data.

Step 3 Click Yes to save Huawei configuration data.


The Wait dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-11.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-9

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-11 Wait dialog box

The system automatically saves the Huawei configuration parameters and displays the number
of all imported records and the number of updated records, as shown in Figure 4-12
Figure 4-12 Total records information box

Step 4 Click OK.


The Wait dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 Wait dialog box

Step 5 Import information about Huawei neighboring cells.


The Import Neb Config data dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-14.

4-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-14 Import Neb Config data dialog box

The Neb Table dialog box is displayed, indicating that the import of neighboring cell relation
succeeds, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15 Neb Table dialog box

Step 6 Click OK.


----End

Importing Alcatel Configuration Parameters


To import Alcatel configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Alcatel.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-11

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-16 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 2 Perform step 3 through step 5 in Importing Huawei Configuration Parameters.


----End

Importing Siemens Configuration Parameters


To import Siemens configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Siemens.
The Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-17.

4-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-17 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box

Step 2 Perform the steps 3 through 5 in Importing Huawei Configuration Parameters.


----End

4.2 Exporting Data


The data export involves the following operations:
z

Exporting Engineering Parameters

Exporting Configuration Parameters

4.2.1 Exporting Engineering Parameters


To export the engineering parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Engineering Parameters.
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-18.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-13

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-18 Output dialog box

Step 2 Select the indicators to be exported.


Step 3 Click OK.
----End

4.2.2 Exporting Configuration Parameters


Exporting Huawei (Alcatel, Siemens) Configuration Parameters
To export the configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters > Huawei, Alcatel or Simens, as shown in
Figure 4-19.

4-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-19 Exporting configuration parameters

The configuration parameter table is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-20.


Figure 4-20 Configuration parameter table exported in .xls format

----End

Exporting Huawei PCU Configuration Parameters


To export Huawei PCU configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters > Huawei (PCU).
The Output PCU Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-21.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-15

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-21 Output PCU Config dialog box

Step 2 Select the PCU of the configuration parameters to be exported.


Step 3 Click OK.
The configuration parameters are exported in .xls format, as shown in Figure 4-22.

4-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-22 Configuration parameter exported in .xls format

----End

4.3 Maintaining the Data


This function enables you to upload engineering parameters to the Nastar server, or download
engineering parameters that already exist on the server. Using this function, you can record
and share engineering parameters.
The sharing of engineering parameters is used in the scenario where multi-users use the same
server. If one of the users has modified the engineering parameters and uploaded the modified
parameters to the server, another user can directly download the modified parameters. In this
way, the data is synchronized.

4.3.1 Uploading Engineering Parameters


To upload the engineering parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Engineering Parameters.
The Backup Engineering Parameter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-23 and
Figure 4-24.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-17

4 Data Mangement

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 4-23 Backup Engineering Parameter dialog boxDownload selected

4-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-24 Backup Engineering Parameter dialog boxUpload selected

Step 2 Select Upload, and select an item for the backup.


z

If Upload and to Last Item are selected, the oldest backup item is selected
automatically.

The unused indicates the backup item is not used. When the unused backup is uploaded
to a used backup, the previous backup is replaced by the unused backup.

Step 3 Enter the name for the backup item in the Name field and the description for the backup in
the Description field.
The Name field is required while the Description field is optional.
Step 4 Click OK.
After you succeed in uploading the engineering parameters, a message is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-25.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-19

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-25 Message displayed after you upload the engineering parameters

When other users upload or download the engineering parameters, you cannot perform this operation.
The system displays a message, indicating that the database has been locked by other users. In such a
situation, wait a moment and then try again.
The engineering parameters can have a maximum of ten backups. The operation of engineering
parameter backup is the same with that of engineering parameter synchronization.

----End

4.3.2 Downloading Engineering Parameters


To download the engineering parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Engineering Parameters.
The Backup Engineering Parameter dialog box displayed, as shown in Figure 4-23.
Step 2 Select Download and a used backup item.
Step 3 Click OK.
After you succeed in downloading the engineering parameters, a message is displayed, as
shown in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Message displayed after you download the engineering parameters

Step 4 Click OK.


The site map is updated.

When other users download the engineering parameters, you cannot perform this operation. The system
displays a message, indicating that the database has been locked by other user. In such a situation, wait a
moment and then try again.

4-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

----End

4.3.3 Modifying Engineering Parameters


To modify the engineering parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

(map select icon) on the toolbar.

Step 2 Select a cell, or press Ctrl to select multiple cells on the map, and then right-click the selected
cells, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Shortcut menu of the selected cell

Step 3 Choose Modify Engineering Parameters from the shortcut menu.


The Edit Parameters dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-28.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-21

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-28 Edit Parameters dialog box

Step 4 Edit the engineering parameters in the Edit Parameters dialog box.
Step 5 Click OK.
Ensure that the longitudes, latitudes, and azimuths are not blank.

----End

4.3.4 Comparing Engineering Parameters


Choose Project > Compare Project Parameters > Last Imported. Alternatively, choose
Project > Compare Project Parameters > Last Closed.
An .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-29.

4-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-29 Engineering parameter comparison

The Engineering parameter comparison file consists of the following sheets:


z

Project Parameters

Neighbor Record

Autoplan Neighbor Record

The system compares the current engineering parameter table with that of last import to know
the addition, deletion, or modification of the engineering parameters.

4.3.5 Backing Up and Restoring the Engineering Parameters


Two ways are available for backing up and restoring the engineering parameters.
z

System-triggering backup
During the last import, the system automatically backs up an engineering parameter table
and saves the table in the database.

Restoring the backup records


Cancel the modifications on engineering parameters, neighboring cell configuration
relation, and the planning of neighboring cells so that all these parameters are the same
as those of the last import.
To cancel the modifications on engineering parameters, neighboring cell configuration
relation, and the planning of neighboring cells, choose either of the following methods:

Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Imported.
The parameters described previously is restored to the status of the last import.

Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Closed.
The parameters described previously is restored to the status of the last closed.

The function of Undo Project Parameter Modification should be used with care. If you
must execute this operation, for backup purposes, Huawei recommends that you export the
latest engineering parameters and neighboring cell relations before executing this operation.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-23

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.3.6 Downloading Configuration Data


If the concerned configuration parameters do not exist on the local PC, import configuration
parameters or download them from the server. After downloading the configuration
parameters from the server, you can observe the updated vendor parameters in the cell
property. At the same time, some engineering parameters are also updated.
The updated engineering parameters are as follows:
z

BSC Name

BISC

TCH

FH Mode

HSN

MA

Equ Type

Vendor

TRXs

To download the configuration parameters, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Choose Project > Download Config. Parameters.
A report on synchronizing local cells with the cell on the server is generated, as shown in
Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 Synchronization Report dialog box

Step 2 Click Output to export the configuration data. Alternatively, click OK.
If you plan to download the configuration data, the system refreshes engineering parameters based on
the mapping between the configuration data and the engineering parameters. In addition, the updated
engineering parameters act as the benchmark.
If the configuration data is not downloaded, the engineering parameters act as the benchmark. After the
download of the configuration data, the Nastar GSM updates the local engineering parameters.

----End

4-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.3.7 Displaying Configuration Parameters


After the configuration parameters are downloaded successfully, they are displayed on the
Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab page of the Property pane, as shown in Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab of the Property pane

4.3.8 Checking Parameters


Checking the BSC Parameters
The Nastar GSM provides the following checking functions:
z

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Check whether the network parameters are in accordance with those suggested in the
user manual.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-25

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement
z

Check unidirectional adjacent cells, co-BCCH, co-BSIC, and co-adjacent frequency cells
in the site.

Check the health for the data related to networking planning.

The functions described previously can be implemented during the import of the .dbf files.
To check the BSC parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > RNP Check Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 RNP Check Report Analysis

The RNP Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-33.

4-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-33 RNP Check dialog box

Step 2 Click

to select a path for saving the RNP check report.

The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder dialog box

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-27

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Step 3 Select a directory, and then click OK.


Step 4 Select one or more BSCs to be checked.
Step 5 Click the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab.
The BSC-RNP Para Setting tab is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-35 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab

Step 6 Select the items that you want to query.


z

If you select Cells with Fewer Neighbor Check, then you need to set the minimum
number for neighbors.

If you select Far Neighbor Check, then you need to set the maximum distance for
neighbors.

Table 4-2 describes the elements in the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page.
Table 4-2 Description of the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page
Element
Sheet Setting

4-28

Description
ARFCN Utilization
Check

For details, refer to section 5.1.4 "Checking


Spectrum efficiency."

Config. Data Check

Checks the configuration data based on the


recommended value, provides the rational
suggestion, and highlights the value within or
beyond the range of the advised value in
different colors.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Element

4 Data Mangement

Description
Channel Check

Checks whether the co-frequency exists in the


neighboring cells frequency, based on the
neighboring relation.

Co-BCCH Co-BSIC
(Neb)

For details, refer to section. .5.1.2 "Checking


Co-Channel and Co-BSIC."

Co-BCCH Co-BSIC
Check

For details, refer to section .5.1.2 "Checking


Co-Channel and Co-BSIC."

Single Nebs(Network)

Checks all the unidirectional neighboring cells


based on the neighboring relation.

Cells with Fewer


Neighbor Check

Checks the cells with neighbors less than the


value specified in the Neighbor number field.

Far Neighbor Check

Checks the cells that have the distance longer


than the value specified in the Neighbor
distance field.

Step 7 Click OK.


An RNP check report is generated, as shown in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Parameter Rationality check report in an .xls file

----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-29

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

RNP Parameter Rationality Check is in compliance with the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800 Network
Layout Data Configuration Regulations, in which recommended values and ranges are set in general
scenarios. Even when the recommended value is used, a cell, however, can still be unhealthy due to its
own dbf data. The engineers in the field of network optimization must check according to the Huawei
GSM BSS&PCU&GT800 Network Layout Data Configuration Regulations and the remarks in the
question list.

Checking PCU Parameters


To check parameter rationality for the PCU, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > RNP Check Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 RNP Check Report Analysis

The RNP Check dialog box is displayed, as shown previously in Figure 4-33.
Step 2 Choose a path, and select one or more PCUs to be checked in the RNP Check dialog box.
Step 3 Click OK.
The parameter rationality check report of the PCU is generated, as shown in Figure 4-38.

4-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-38 RNP report

Table 4-3 describes the three sheets of the configuration parameter check report.
Table 4-3 Description of the configuration parameter check report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Displays the name of the network and the table header format
of the report.

Overview

Displays the report of BSC configuration parameters.

PCU Parameters Check

Displays the checking results of PCU configuration


parameters.

----End

4.4 Maintaining Network Elements


Network maintenance aims to maintain the basic information about the BTSs and the cells in
a project.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-31

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.4.1 Creating a Site


To create a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > New Site.
The pointer turns into a cross.
Step 2 Move the pointer to the desired place on the site view and click.
The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-39.
Figure 4-39 Site Edit dialog box

Step 3 Specify the site name and the other information in the Site Information tab page.
Step 4 Click the Cell Information tab, as shown in Figure 4-40.

4-32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-40 Cell Information tab page of the Site Edit dialog box

The Cells group box lists all the cells of the current BTS. For a new BTS, the Cells group box
of a new BS is null.
Step 5 Click Add to add a cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell.
Ensure that TCH values are separated by comma.
Step 6 Click OK.
Based on the latitude and longitude, the BTS and its cells are displayed in the site view.
----End

4.4.2 Editing a Site


To edit a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Edit Site.
Step 2 Move the pointer to any cell of a desired site and click.
The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-41.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-33

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-41 Site Edit dialog box

Step 3 Edit the site and cell information to change the attribute of the site and cell.
Click Add to add a cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell.
Step 4 Click OK to save the changes of the site and close the Site Edit dialog box. Alternatively,
click Apply to save the changes.
----End

Deleting all cells leads to deletion of the associated site.

4.4.3 Moving a Site


To move a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

on the toolbar.

The mouse pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.

4-34

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Step 2 Drag the BTS to the desired place.


A prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-42.
Figure 4-42 Prompt confirming the BTS dragging operation

Step 3 Click Yes to move the selected site, or click No to cancel the operation.
----End

4.4.4 Deleting a Site


To delete a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

on the toolbar.

The mouse pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.


Step 2 Select a site, or press Ctrl to select multiple sites.
The selected sites appear in red oblique grid.
Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Site.
A prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43 Prompt confirming the BTS deletion operation

Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected sites, or click No to cancel the operation.
After the site is deleted, the neighboring cells are regrouped.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-35

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.4.5 Deleting a Cell


The procedure for deleting a cell is similar to that for deleting a site.
To delete a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

on the toolbar.

The mouse pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.


Step 2 Select a cell, and press Ctrl to select multiple cells.
The selected cells appear in red oblique grid.
Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Cell.
A prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Prompt confirming the cell deletion operation

Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected cells, or click No to cancel the operation.
----End

The BTSs and cells involved in this manual are used only for illustrating the operation of the Nastar
GSM. They do not represent the actual situation in the current network.

4.5 Extracting Performance Data


The Nastar GSM provides StatTrans, a tool used to periodically extract performance data.
This tool can split OMC performance data files of a large size into smaller sizes before the
analysis result data is sent to the local server for analysis. Using the StatTrans, you can solve
this problem. The split files, however, cannot be queried on the OMC performance data
console, and can be checked only by the GENEX Nastar GSM after being statically imported
to the Nastar database server through the TransData.
To start the StatTrans, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > GENEX Nastar > StatTrans.
The StatTrans window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45.

4-36

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-45 StatTrans window

Step 2 Select the performance data public information file (pubinfo.tsk) in the Source Directory
field.
z

If you click
to select the source directory, the task information is
automatically displayed in the StatTrans window.

If you directly type the directory, you need to click List Statistic to display the task
information.

Step 3 Select one or multiple tasks to be exported.


Step 4 Set the start time and end time.
Step 5 Click Convert.
The corresponding data is exported to the fixed path, that is, C:\ Program Files\Huawei
GENEX\Nastar GSM\Tools\Transfer by default. The file name is the same as the original one.
You can use these files to statically import data.
----End

4.6 Importing the Performance Data


The TransData can statically import the data extracted by the StatTrans into the Nastar
database server. The TransData can also dynamically import the data in the OMC
performance console.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-37

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.6.1 Starting the SQL Server


To start the SQL server, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Install the SQL Server 2000 on the server.
The server can be a desktop or a laptop. For details, refer to 2.4 "Installing the MS SQL
Server."
Step 2 Run Service Manager and start SQL Server Service Manager.
Huawei recommends that you select the Auto-start service when OS starts.
z

If SQL Server Service Manager starts successfully, a green icon marked in red circle is
displayed on the right of the Windows taskbar.

If SQL Server runs at background, check the status of SQL Server Service Manager, as
shown in Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46 SQL Server Service Manager screen

Figure 4-47 SQL Server on the taskbar

In remote import mode, that is, the TransData accesses the SQL Server through the LAN to
conduct data import, perform the following steps:
1.

Create a shared directory \NastarTmp on the SQL Server.

2.

Place a file named exedir.loc in this shared directory.

3.

Set the file path to E: \NastarTmp and the shared password.

When you run the TransData on the local server for the first time, you need to type the
network directory and select Remember Password. In this way, next time you can run the
TransData in the same way as that of local import.

4-38

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

The TransData automatically copies the processed performance data to the shared directory
\NastarTmp and imports the data to the SQL Server.

The performance data occupies enormous space of the hard disk. Therefore, ensure that more than 10
GB of the hard disk is reserved for storing the BSC performance data.

----End

4.6.2 Preparing the Data File


The following files are required for the import of the traffic statistic data:
z

BSC performance file

BSC data configuration file

PCU performance file

PCU data configuration file

4.6.3 Using the TransData


Starting the TransData
To start the TransData, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start TransData.exe.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48 Login dialog box

Table 4-4 describes the elements in the Login dialog box.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-39

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Table 4-4 Login dialog box


Element

Description

Nastar server

Enter the SQL Server name and service name.


The server name can be the computer name or IP address of the
server.
z

In standalone edition, enter the server name in the way


of .\service name.

In server edition, enter the server name or IP address\service


name.

User name

Enter the user name.

Password

Enter the password.

Remember PassWord

If you select Remember PassWord, you do not need to enter


the username and password next time.

Delete&Clear Database

If you select Delete&Clear Database, the TransData deletes


all the existing local networks and BSCs.

If you need create a new Nastar database, select


Delete&Clear Database.

Huawei recommends that you select Delete&Clear Database


with care. Otherwise, unpredictable errors may happen.

Step 2 Enter the server name and service name in the Nastar Server field.
Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the User Name and Password fields respectively.
Step 4 Click OK.
The TransData starts, as shown in Figure 4-49.

4-40

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-49 TransData2.3 window

----End

Creating a Local Network


To create a local network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose NET > Add Net.
The Network Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-41

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-50 Network Information dialog box

Table 4-5 describes the elements in the Network Information dialog box.
Table 4-5 Description of the elements in the Network Information dialog box
Element

Description

Radio Network Info

Database Info

Network Name

Enter the name of the local Network.

Operator

Select a vendor from the Operator


drop-down list.

Database Name

Enter a name for the database.

Driver

Select a disk letter from the Driver


drop-down list.

File Name

Radio Network Description

4-42

Driver indicates the drive letter on the server


instead of on the local disk.

If you do not select the drive letter, the default


driver is used.

Before importing the data in a database to the


database server, ensure that the selected drive
on the server is available.

The File Name field shows the directory of


the database after the Database Name and
Driver are set.
Enter the description of the local network.
The Radio Network Description field is
optional.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Step 2 Type the name of the local Network in the Network Name field.
Step 3 Select a vendor from the Operator drop-down list.
Step 4 Type a name for the database in Database Name.
Step 5 Select a drive letter from the Driver drop-down list.
Step 6 Enter the description of the local network in the Radio Network Description field.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End

Creating a BSC
To create a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose NET > Add BSC. Alternatively, right-click the local network from the navigation
tree on the left pane and choose Add BSC on the shortcut menu.
The BSC Property dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-51.
Figure 4-51 BSC Property dialog box

Step 2 Enter the name of the BSC in the BSC Name field.
Step 3 Select a service type from the Service drop-down list.
Step 4 Select a device vendor from the Device Vendor drop-down list.
Step 5 Select the BSC version from the Version drop-down list.
Step 6 Click OK.
The new BSC is displayed on the left pane, as shown in Figure 4-52.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-43

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-52 Main interface of the Transdata

----End

Importing BSC Configuration Data


To import the BSC configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a BSC in the workspace.
The BSC information is displayed on the right pane, as shown in Figure 4-53.
Figure 4-53 BSC information

Step 2 Click Browse on the right side of the OMC Config Data Path field.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-54.

4-44

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-54 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 3 Select the BSC configuration data path, and then click OK.
Step 4 Click Browse on the right side of Static Statistic Data path field.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-54.
Step 5 Select the BSC traffic statistic path, and then click OK.
Step 6 Choose BSC > Run Update OMC Data, or choose Run Update OMC Data from the
shortcut menu to import the BSC configuration data.
----End

Adding a PCU
To add a PCU, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a NET from the navigation tree on the left pane, as shown in Figure 4-55.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-45

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-55 Tree list on the left panel

Step 2 Choose ADD PCU on the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-56 Shortcut menu of a NET

The PCU Property dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-57.

4-46

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-57 PCU Property dialog box

Step 3 Set the PCU information in the PCU Property dialog box, as described in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6 describes the elements in the PCU Property dialog box.
Table 4-6 Description of the PCU Property dialog box
Parameter

Description

PCU Name

Enter the name for the PCU in the PCU Name field.

Device Vendor

Select the device vendor from the Device Vendor drop-down list.

Version

Select a version from the Version drop-down list.

Step 4 After the setting, click OK.


z

If the PCU is created successfully, the system gives the following message, as shown in
Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Success load message

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

If the PCU name already exists, a message is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-59. Click
OK in the dialog box to recreate a PCU.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-47

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-59 Message dialog box

----End

Importing the PCU Configuration Data


To import the PCU configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a PCU from the navigation tree on the left pane.
Step 2 Click Browse on the right side of the OMC Config Data Path field.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-60.
Figure 4-60 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 3 Select the path of the configuration data, and click OK.
Ensure that the path of the PCU configuration data is correct before you continue with the
next step. If the path of configuration data is incorrect, the system prompts you to check the
path, as shown in Figure 4-61.

4-48

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-61 Dialog box about the incorrect path of configuration data

After the PCU configuration data is successfully imported, the Import PCU Statistic Data on
the shortcut menu is available, as shown in Figure 4-62.
Figure 4-62 Shortcut menu of a PCU

Table 4-7 describes the functions of the four options on the shortcut menu.
Table 4-7 Description of the shortcut menu of a PCU
Option

Description

Import PCU Config Data

Imports the PCU configuration data.

Import PCU Statistic


Data

Imports the PCU performance data and imports the data into
the database.

Del PCU

Deletes the PCUs under the NET node.

Del History data

Deletes the history data.

The import should follow the sequence of importing configuration parameters first, and then the
performance data. The Import PCU Statistic Data option is unavailable before the import of the
configuration parameters.

Step 4 Choose Importing PCU Config Data from the shortcut menu.
After the PCU configuration data is imported successfully, a message is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-63.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-49

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-63 Message about successfully imported configuration data

----End

Importing PCU Statistic Data


After the import of the configuration data, the Import PCU Statistic Data option becomes
available, as shown in Figure 4-64.
Figure 4-64 Import PCU Statistic Data option

To import the PCU statistic data, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Click Browse on the right side of the Static Statistic Data Path field on the right panel.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select the correct path of the PCU statistic data, and then click OK.
Ensure that the path of the PCU statistic data is correct before you continue with the next step.
If the path of the PCU statistic data is incorrect, a message is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-65.

4-50

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-65 Dialog box about the incorrect path of PCU statistic data

Step 3 Choose Importing PCU Statistic Data from the shortcut menu.
The system begins to import the statistic data and the common data.
After the common data is imported successfully, a message is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-66.
Figure 4-66 Message about successfully imported statistic data

----End

Deleting the PCU History Data


To delete the PCU history data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click the PCU to be deleted from the navigation tree on the left pane.
Step 2 Choose Del History Data from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-67.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-51

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-67 Del PCU on the shortcut menu

The History Date dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-68.


Figure 4-68 History Date dialog box

If the following dialog box is displayed, infer that no history data exist in the PCU.
Figure 4-69 History PCU data

Step 3 Modify the start time and end time of the PCU data.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

Initializing a Task
Initializing a task causes all the new or modified task information to be lost. As a result, the
system returns to the original state. Huawei recommends initializing a task when a great
number of tasks are damaged or unavailable in the local network.
To initialize a task, perform the following steps:

4-52

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Step 1 Choose NET > Initial Task. Alternatively, right-click a local network in the navigation tree
on the left pane, and then choose Initial Task from the shortcut menu.
The system prompts a message about task initialization, as shown in Figure 4-70.
Figure 4-70 Message displayed during task initialization

----End

Backing Up a Task
Backing up a task is to back up the new or modified task information to the directory
of .\TASK\Backup\. The server administrator is recommended to periodically back up the
task or to back up the tasks after the tasks are upgraded or modified significantly.
To back up a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose NET > Backup Task. Alternatively, right-click the local net in the navigation tree on
the left panel and choose Backup Task from the shortcut menu.
The system prompts a message during task backup, as shown in Figure 4-71.
Figure 4-71 Message during task backup

----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-53

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

The system saves only the latest task backup information. If you want to save the task backup
information of different periods, copy the following BCP files in the .\TASK\Backup\ directory to your
own directory.
CommItemDict.bcp
CommStatTableDesc.bcp
CommTableIdx.bcp
Erl_b.bcp
GRAPHDRAWITEMS.bcp
NAStarItemDict.bcp
PRESQL.bcp
ITEDRAWITEMS.bcp
SUBTASKS.bcp
TASKEXP.bcp
TASKS.bcp.
Once you want to restore the task information, you only need to copy the 11 files described previously to
the directory .\TASK\Backup\.

Resuming a Task
This task is performed to resume a task by using the backup files. If you want to resume the
task, copy the 11 backup files to the directory .\TASK\Backup\.
To resume a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose NET > Resume Task. Alternatively, right-click the local network in the navigation
tree and choose Resume Task from the shortcut menu.
The system prompts a message during task recovery, as shown in Figure 4-72.
Figure 4-72 Message displayed during task recovery

----End

Configuring the Imported Performance Data


To configure the imported performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Tools > Options.
The Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-73.

4-54

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-73 Option dialog box

Step 2 Select English from the OMC Statistic Language Version drop-down list.
Step 3 Enter the period for analyzing the traffic statistic data in the Data Cycle field.
Step 4 Select the Only import the same cycle data option.
Step 5 Select the Verify Statistic Data option.
Step 6 Select the Don't show time config and import all data field.
Step 7 Select the Delete statistic data automatically option.
Step 8 Enter an integer to set the date of each month to begin the data conversion.
Step 9 Enter an integer (for example, 3) in the Delete all special item month ago field.
Step 10 Enter an integer (for example, 6) in the Delete all common item month ago field.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-55

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Periodically clear and back up the files in the Application\Runtime directory. Otherwise, the disk space
becomes small, and the system performance deteriorates.
For the data that are segemented by the StatTrans or dynamically segemented by the Naconvert, clear the
Verify Statistic Data option during the import of the statistic data. Otherwise, the data may fail to be
imported.

Statically Importing the Performance Data


To statically import the performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose BSC > Run Static Statistic Import. Alternatively, right-click a BSC and choose Run
Static Statistic Import from the shortcut menu.
The Tasks Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-74.
Figure 4-74 Tasks Information dialog box

Step 2 Set the start date and end date in the Input Date field.
Step 3 Set the start time and end time in the Input Time field.
Step 4 Select Import all statistic data.
Step 5 Click Check Task Time.
Step 6 Choose a task to be imported, and then click OK.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End

Ensure that the configuration data of the current BSC is imported, and the path of the traffic statistic data
in the statistic data directory is valid before you statically import the statistic traffic data.

4-56

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Dynamically Importing the Performance Data


To dynamically import the performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Create a shared directory with write permission on the server, and enable the dynamic import
function.
Step 2 Select a BSC from the navigation tree on the left pane.
The BSC information is displayed on the left pane, as shown in Figure 4-75.
Figure 4-75 BSC information

Step 3 Type the directory of the remote shared folder in the Dynamic Statistic Data Path field.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Choose BSC > Run Dynamic Statistic Import to import the data dynamically.
The Transdata checks in real time whether new performance data exists. If new data exists,
the Transdata starts another import.
----End

Common Problems in Statistic Data Import


z

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Problem: 2006/06/23 10:50:47 cannot Open BSC [TEST_1_8->loudi] Private Task File
--- D:\loudic10\data\st010.tsk. Please check.

Reason: The task definition file is not found in the pubinfo.tsk file.

Solution: Check whether this task is registered in the BAM, whether the traffic
statistic file is dynamically segmented by the Naconvert or by the StatTrans, and
whether the *.tsk file of the task is removed manually.

Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:59 An item with invalid time was found in C:\Documents
and Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053\st053.IDX,skip this item.

Reason: The statistic file contains some illegal data.

Solution: Check the file source.

Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:54 File C:\Documents and


Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053.res Format Error! No ValueSize in
different Res file does not match the previous result will be abandoned.

Reason: The items are different with those in the register file.

Solution: Check whether the BAM makes changes on the tasks during its running.
Huawei recommends that you import the tasks before and after the modification to
avoid data loss.

Problem: indicated in Figure 4-76.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-57

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-76 Problem hint dialog box

Reason: The internal data in the .tsk file do not match with that in the *.res file.

Solution: For the statistic data divided by the StatTrans or the Naconvert, clear the
Verify Statistic Data checkbox during the import of static data. If the problem
persists, check the data source.

Deleting BSC History Data


You can remove the expired data from the current BSC to reduce the number of redundant and
useless data records in the database.
To delete the BSC history data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose BSC > Delete History Data.
The History Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-77.
Figure 4-77 History Data dialog box

Step 2 Select the date range of the data to be deleted, or select Delete all history data to delete all
history data.
Step 3 Select the Shrink Database option to shrink the database.
Step 4 Select the Delete common data option to delete the common data.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

4-58

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Deleting a Local Network


To delete a local network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Delete a BSC.
1.

Select a BSC from the navigation tree on the left pane.

2.

Choose BSC > Del BSC. The selected BSC is removed from the BSC list.

3.

Delete the local network.

Step 2 Delete the local network.


1.

Select a local network (NET) from the navigation tree on the left pane.

2.

Choose NET> Del Net.

The selected local network is removed from the NET list.


----End

Upgrading the BSC Version


You can upgrade the BSC version to support the performance data of the new format.
To upgrade the BSC version, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose BSC > Upgrade BSC.
The BSC Upgrade dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-78.
Figure 4-78 BSC Upgrade dialog box

Step 2 Select the version to be upgraded to from the Version drop-down list.
Step 3 Set whether to delete the common items by selecting or deselecting the Delete all common
item.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-59

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Closing the TransData


To close the TransData, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click the closure in the TransData window.
Step 2 Right-click the icon for the TransData and choose Quit from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 4-79.
Figure 4-79 Quit option on the shortcut menu

The QUIT dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-80.


Figure 4-80 QUIT dialog box

Step 3 Enter the server name, user name, and password in the Nastar Server, User Name, and
Password fields.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

4.7 Collecting Resource Statistics


Using the function of resource statistics, you can collect resources in the entire network.
These resources include the BSCs, BTSs, cells, carriers, channels, and boards. In this way,
you can familiarize yourself with the configuration of your networks.
To collect the resource statistics, perform the following steps:

4-60

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Step 1 Choose System > Resource Stat.


The Resource Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-81.
Figure 4-81 Resource Stat dialog box

Step 2 In the Resource Stat dialog box, select one or more items in the Stat Scope group box or in
the Source Items field.
For descriptions about the functions of the buttons in the previous dialog box, see Table 4-8.
Table 4-8 Functions of buttons in the Resource Stat dialog box
Button

Used to
Add these selected items to the Destination Items box.
Cancel the previous operation, that is, cancel the selected items in the
Destination Items box.
Select all source items.
Cancel all selected items.

Step 3 Click OK.


The Wait dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-82.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-61

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-82 Collecting resource statistics

The statistic result in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-83.


Figure 4-83 Interface of the resource statistic result

----End

4.8 User Management


This section consists of the following two parts:
z

Management of User Access Rights

Management of User Log

The management of user access rights refers to setting the rights for users for the Nastar and
the TransData, while the user log management refers to users' operation on Nastar log files.

4.8.1 Management of User Access Rights


To set the user access rights, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose System > User Management.
The User Management dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-84.

4-62

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-84 User Management dialog box

Step 2 In the User List field, right-click a user and choose Set User Access Rights from the shortcut
menu.
The Set User Access Rights dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-85.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-63

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-85 Set User Access Rights dialog box

Step 3 Set the rights for users, and then click OK.
----End

4.8.2 Management of User Log


To manage user logs, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose System > User Log.
The User Log dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-86.

4-64

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-86 User Log dialog box

Step 2 In the Log Information group box, right-click a log file.


Three options are available on the shortcut menu. Table 4-9 lists the functions of these
options.
Table 4-9 Options on the shortcut menu
Option

Used to

Update

Obtain the latest operation records of all login users.

Export log files

Save all of the log information to the files.

Clear all log files

Clear the current log information.

----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-65

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

4.9 Backing Up and Restoring the Data


This section describes how to back up and restore the SQL data and the data in the local
database.

4.9.1 Backing Up the Data


To back up data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose System > Data Backup, as shown in Figure 4-87.
Figure 4-87 Data Backup option

Step 2 Set a path for saving the file, and then click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-88.
Figure 4-88 Browse for Folder dialog box

4-66

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-89 Progress indicator for data backup

After the backup, the system gives the following message, as shown in Figure 4-90.
Figure 4-90 Data backup complete dialog box

----End

4.9.2 Restoring the Data


To restore the data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose System > Data Restore, as shown in Figure 4-91.
Figure 4-91 Data Restore option

Step 2 Specify the path for saving files, and then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-92 and Figure 4-93.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-92.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-67

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

4 Data Mangement

Figure 4-92 Browse for Folder dialog box

Figure 4-93 Progress indicator for data restore

When the data restore is complete, the following dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-94.
Figure 4-94 Data restore complete dialog box

----End

4-68

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
5 Network Optimization..............................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Analyzing Frequency.....................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency ......................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC ...................................................................................................5-7
5.1.3 Checking Idle ARFCNS.......................................................................................................................5-9
5.1.4 Checking Spectrum efficiency ...........................................................................................................5-10
5.1.5 Checking Co-HSN Co-MA................................................................................................................5-12
5.1.6 Checking Frequency Optimization ....................................................................................................5-13
5.1.7 Generating the Report of Checking Hopping Frequency ...................................................................5-15
5.2 Analyzing Neighbor Relations ....................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.1 Introducing Neighbor Analysis ..........................................................................................................5-17
5.2.2 Maintaining and Auto Planning the Neighbors Relation....................................................................5-18
5.2.3 Importing the Neighboring Cell Relation...........................................................................................5-29
5.2.4 Importing Neighboring Cell Relation of the Standard Format...........................................................5-30
5.2.5 Exporting and Clearing Neighboring Cell Relation ...........................................................................5-33
5.2.6 Comparing and Backing Up Data ......................................................................................................5-35
5.3 Displaying on Map......................................................................................................................................5-41
5.3.1 Finding a Cell.....................................................................................................................................5-41
5.3.2 Displaying a Location Area................................................................................................................5-42
5.3.3 Displaying the GPRS Cells ................................................................................................................5-45
5.3.4 Displaying the BSC Coverage ...........................................................................................................5-47
5.3.5 Displaying All Sites ...........................................................................................................................5-49
5.3.6 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme ...................................................................................5-50
5.3.7 Displaying a Reference Grid..............................................................................................................5-53
5.3.8 Switching 900/1800 Layer .................................................................................................................5-54
5.3.9 Switching to Configuration Neighboring Cells..................................................................................5-56
5.3.10 Legend Window ...............................................................................................................................5-57
5.3.11 Adding a Map Mark .........................................................................................................................5-58
5.3.12 Importing a Raster Image.................................................................................................................5-59
5.3.13 Changing the Show Setting..............................................................................................................5-62
5.3.14 Setting a Cell Label..........................................................................................................................5-65
5.3.15 Setting a Reference Grid ..................................................................................................................5-67

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
5.3.16 Setting Huawei Configuration Parameters.......................................................................................5-69
5.3.17 Setting Alcatel Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................5-71
5.3.18 Setting Siemens Configuration Parameters......................................................................................5-71
5.3.19 Displaying Engineering Parameters on the Map..............................................................................5-72
5.3.20 Controlling the Map by Mouse and Keyboard.................................................................................5-74

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figures
Figure 5-1 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu ........................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box......................................................................5-3
Figure 5-3 Channel check dialog box.................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-4 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu .................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-5 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box......................................................................5-4
Figure 5-6 ARFCN Check dialog box ................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-7 Check result of the adjacent channel ................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-8 Legend dialog box ............................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-9 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu.....................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-10 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box.......................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-11 Co-channel and co-BSIC cell check dialog box..............................................................................5-8
Figure 5-12 Idle ARFCNS menu........................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-13 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box.......................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-14 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box ........................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-15 Spectrum Utilization menu ...........................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-16 Spectrum Utilization dialog box ................................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-17 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check........................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-18 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu ......................................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-19 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box ..............................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-20 Channel Check dialog box............................................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-21 ARFCN Display dialog box..........................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-22 Frequency Analysis menu.............................................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-23 Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box...................................................................................5-16
Figure 5-24 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format ............................................................................5-17
Figure 5-25 Neighbor Analysis menu...............................................................................................................5-18
Figure 5-26 Neighbors relation effect figure ....................................................................................................5-19

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 5-27 Adding bidirectional neighbors.....................................................................................................5-20


Figure 5-28 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu.........................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-29 Unidirectional neighboring cell check result ................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-30 Neighbor Auto Planning menu .....................................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-31 Antenna Setting tab of the Neighbor Sector setting dialog box ....................................................5-23
Figure 5-32 Property Setting tab of the Neighbor Sector Setting dialog box ...................................................5-24
Figure 5-33 Toolbar..........................................................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-34 Export Neighbor Planning Results menu......................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-35 Adjacent cell relation table ...........................................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-36 Import Neighbor Planning Results menu......................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-37 Please choose upright adjacence relation file to import dialog box ..............................................5-28
Figure 5-38 Select table dialog box..................................................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-39 Clear Planned Neighbors menu ....................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-40 Confirmation box..........................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-41 Import Neighbor File menu ..........................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-42 Neighbor Analysis menu...............................................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-43 Please choose level adjacence relation file to import dialog box..................................................5-31
Figure 5-44 Please choose upright adjacence relation file import dialog box ..................................................5-32
Figure 5-45 Export Neighbors menu ................................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-46 Export Neighbors dialog box........................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-47 Table of horizontal adjacent cells relation in .xls format ..............................................................5-34
Figure 5-48 Table of vertical adjacent cells relation in .xls format ..................................................................5-34
Figure 5-49 Clear Config Neighbors menu ......................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-50 Confirmation box..........................................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-51 Compare Engineering Parameters menu.......................................................................................5-36
Figure 5-52 Result of comparing engineering parameters................................................................................5-37
Figure 5-53 Engineering Parameters tab ..........................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-54 Neighbor Record tab.....................................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-55 Autoplan Neighbor Record tab .....................................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-56 Compare Planned Neighbor with Config menu............................................................................5-40
Figure 5-57 Result of comparing planned neighboring cell with configured neighboring cell ........................5-41
Figure 5-58 Search Cell(s) dialog box..............................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-59 Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box ...............................................................................5-43

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 5-60 Color Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-44


Figure 5-61 LAC Displayed on the map ..........................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-62 Color Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-63 GPRS cells highlighted on the map ..............................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-64 BSC Display Setting dialog box ...................................................................................................5-47
Figure 5-65 Color Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-66 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map.........................................................................................5-49
Figure 5-67 All sites displayed on the map ......................................................................................................5-50
Figure 5-68 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu ...................................................................5-51
Figure 5-69 Show Theme dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-51
Figure 5-70 Result of the highlighted theme ....................................................................................................5-53
Figure 5-71 Display reference grid...................................................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-72 900 MHz layer ..............................................................................................................................5-55
Figure 5-73 1800 MHz layer ............................................................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-74 Legend window during network optimization analysis ................................................................5-57
Figure 5-75 Legend window during adjacent channel checking ......................................................................5-57
Figure 5-76 Add Legend...................................................................................................................................5-58
Figure 5-77 Add Map Mark dialog box............................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-78 Map Mark dialog box ...................................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-79 Open Raster Image dialog box......................................................................................................5-60
Figure 5-80 Raster Image dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-61
Figure 5-81 Click image to add a point dialog box ..........................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-82 Show Items Option dialog box .....................................................................................................5-63
Figure 5-83 Case of a too large displaying area ...............................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-84 Displaying the area range after being corrected............................................................................5-65
Figure 5-85 Option dialog box .........................................................................................................................5-66
Figure 5-86 Result figure with the cell label ....................................................................................................5-67
Figure 5-87 Grid Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................5-68
Figure 5-88 Site View window with the reference grid....................................................................................5-69
Figure 5-89 Config data show setting dialog box.............................................................................................5-70
Figure 5-90 Property window...........................................................................................................................5-71
Figure 5-91 Engineering Parameter Select dialog box .....................................................................................5-72
Figure 5-92 Color Config dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-73

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 5-93 Render the map .............................................................................................................................5-74

vi

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Tables

Tables
Table 5-1 Frequency bands supported by the Nastar GSM.................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box ................................................................................5-14
Table 5-3 Description of the Antenna Setting tab .............................................................................................5-24
Table 5-4 Description of the Property Setting tab ............................................................................................5-24
Table 5-5 Recommended values for the smallest down-line receiving level ....................................................5-26
Table 5-6 Description of the result of comparing engineering parameters .......................................................5-37
Table 5-7 description of the Show Theme dialog box ......................................................................................5-52

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vii

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Network Optimization

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

5.1 Analyzing Frequency

The types of frequency analysis.

5.2 Analyzing Neighbor


Relations

The operations for analyzing neighboring cells and the


procedure for planning neighboring cell relations.

5.3 Displaying on Map

The operations on the map.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.1 Analyzing Frequency


The frequency analysis provides the following common functions used in the network
analysis:
Neighbor co-frequency check
Co-channel and co-BSIC check
Unused ARFCNS check
Spectrum distribution check
Co-HA and co-MA check
Frequency optimization check
Table 5-1 lists the frequency bands supported by the Nastar GSM.
Table 5-1 Frequency bands supported by the Nastar GSM
Frequency

Band

Rang of n

FU

P-GSM 900

Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2 n

1 n 124

Fu (n) = Fl (n) +
45

E-GSM 900

Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2 n

0 n 124

Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2

975 n 1023

Fu (n) = Fl (n) +
45

(n-1024)
R-GSM 900

DCS 1800

Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2 n

0 n 124

Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2


(n-1024)

955 n
1023

Fl (n) = 1710.2 + 0.2 (n-512)

512 n 885

Fu (n) = Fl (n) +
45

Fu (n) = Fl (n) +
95

5.1.1 Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency


The MA list of the hopping frequency is considered as the checking objects in the neighbor
co-frequency check.

Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Cell


To check neighbor co-frequency by cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Check Neighbor Co-frequency > By Cell, as shown in
Figure 5-1.

5-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-1 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu

The Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-2.
Figure 5-2 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box

Step 2 Enter the radius of the cell in the Check cells within (km) field.
Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field.
Co-channel
Adjacent-channel
BCCH
TCH
Display labels with Distinguished BCCD and TCH
Step 4 Click OK.
The mouse pointer turns into cross pointer.
Step 5 Select a cell in the Site View window, and check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the
selected cell.
The Channel check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Channel check dialog box

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-3

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

The current channel is shown in the Current Channel field.


Step 6 Select all the frequencies that the selected cell uses from the drop-down list, or click
to switch the frequency.
or
----End

Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Frequency


To check neighbor co-frequency by frequency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Check Neighbor Co-frequency > By ARFCN, as shown in
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu

The Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box

Step 2 Set the frequency range in the ARFCN Range field.


Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field.
Co-channel check
Adjacent-channel check
BCCH
TCH
Step 4 Click OK to check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the selected frequency in the whole
network.
The ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown Figure 5-6.

5-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-6 ARFCN Check dialog box

The current frequency is shown in the Current ARFCN field of the ARFCN Check dialog
box.
Step 5 Select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click
frequency.

or

to switch the

----End

Introducing the Meaning of Each CI


If BCCH and TCH are both selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box, the
system marks B, T, B-T and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel.
The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:
B-T: compares the BCCH and TCH to current frequency. Meanwhile, the value in TCH
is the lower (upper) adjacent channel of the current frequency.
T-T: compares the TCH of this cell to current frequency. Meanwhile the upper (lower)
adjacent channels also exist in TCH, and the BCCH is neither adjacent nor equal to the
current frequency.
B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (lower) adjacent channel and the
TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current frequency.
T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the upper (lower) adjacent channel
of current frequency, and BCCH value is neither adjacent to nor equal to current
frequency, as shown in Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-7 Check result of the adjacent channel

5-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-8 Legend dialog box

5.1.2 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC


To check co-channel and co-BSIC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check, as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu

The Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-10.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-7

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-10 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box

Step 2 Select one of the following search types in the Search Select field.
Search by Specified BCCH and BSIC
Enter the cell number of the specified BCCH and BSIC, and the cells are displayed in
certain color in the Site View window.
Search Co-BCCH Co-BSIC in Neighbor
Search the co-BSIC cells that are mutual adjacent cells.
Search Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Cells in the Whole Network
Search the co-channel and co-BSIC cell in the whole network, and calculate the distance
between the two cells.
Step 3 Click OK.
The Co-channel and co-BSIC cell check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Co-channel and co-BSIC cell check dialog box

5-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Step 4 Select a cell in the Co-channel and co-BSIC cell check dialog box, and right-click the
selected cell to save the check result in .txt format.

Click the table header (BCCH, BSIC, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header.
Click the header once to sort out the cells in ascending order, and double-click the header to sort out the
cells in descending order.

----End

5.1.3 Checking Idle ARFCNS


To check the idle ARFCNS, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Idle ARFCNS, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Idle ARFCNS menu

The Idle ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box

Step 2 Set the region for check.


Whole network
Selected area.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-9

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

If Selected area is selected, you can use


window to select cells.

or

on the toolbar of the Site View

Step 3 Set the frequency range.


Step 4 Click OK to check the idle frequency.
The Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box is displayed, showing Idle ARFCN list, Used
ARFCN and times, as shown in Figure 5-14.
Figure 5-14 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box

----End

5.1.4 Checking Spectrum efficiency


To check the spectrum efficiency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Spectrum Utilization, as shown in Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 Spectrum Utilization menu

The Spectrum Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-16.

5-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-16 Spectrum Utilization dialog box

Step 2 Set the ARFCN range.


Step 3 Select the ARFCN type
BCCH
TCH.
Step 4 Click OK to check the BCCH or TCH spectrum efficiency.
The ARFCN Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check

Step 5 Select an ARFCN in the ARFCN Utilization dialog box, and right-click the selected ARFCN
to save the check result in .txt format.

Click the table header (Allocate Times, Cell Count, or Utilization) to sort out all cells based on the
selected header. Click the header once to sort out the ARFCNs in ascending order, or double-click the
header to sort out the ARFCNs in descending order.

----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-11

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.1.5 Checking Co-HSN Co-MA


To check co-HSN co-MA, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-HSN Co-MA Check, as shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu

The Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box

The MA cells are listed in the Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box.
Step 2 Select a cell, and right-click the selected cell to save the check result.
Click the table header (HSN, MA, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header. Click
the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, double-click the header to sort out the cells in
a descending order.

----End

5-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.1.6 Checking Frequency Optimization


Frequency optimization check is to generate the analysis result of the frequency interference
between cells and frequency utilization rates.
Use the current frequency (BCCH, TCH), adjacent frequency, and a set of available
frequencies previously set in the network to obtain the idle frequencies for selection.
To check the frequency optimization, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > check Frequency optimization.
The Channel Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-20 Channel Check dialog box

Step 2 Set the distance range for the cells to be checked.


The default value is 30.0000.
Step 3 Set an ARFCN range.
The system supports the frequency ranging from 0 to1023.
Step 4 Click OK.
The mouse turns into the Map select state.
Step 5 Select a cell in the Site View window.
The selected cell is marked in green and the ARFCN Display dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-21.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-13

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-21 ARFCN Display dialog box

Table 5-2 describes the elements in the ARFCN Display dialog box.
Table 5-2 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box
Element

Description

Current ARFCN

Shows the frequency list of the current cell. The first row shows the
BCCH frequency, and the following rows show the TCH frequency.

Neighbor ARFCN

Lists the all frequency used by the cell, including BCCH and TCH.
The frequencies are listed in an ascending order.

Idle ARFCN

Shows the used frequency.

Step 6 Perform the following operations in the ARFCN Display dialog box.
Click a record in the Idle ARFCN list to display the cell with co-channel and adjacent
cells in the range set by you.
Click an ARFCN in the Current ARFCN list to check co-channel and adjacent cells in
the range set by you.
Click a record in the Neighbor ARFCN list to show the information of the adjacent cell.
Mark the co-frequency and adjacent cell of the ARFCN (display on the map).

5-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

----End

5.1.7 Generating the Report of Checking Hopping Frequency


To generate the report of checking hopping frequency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Frequency Hopping Check Report, as shown in Figure
5-22.
Figure 5-22 Frequency Analysis menu

The Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-23.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-15

5 Network Optimization

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 5-23 Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select a path for saving the frequency hopping check report
Step 3 Select objects to be checked in the Object Select list.
Step 4 Click OK.
The report of checking hopping frequency is generated, as shown in Figure 5-24.

5-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-24 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format

----End

5.2 Analyzing Neighbor Relations


5.2.1 Introducing Neighbor Analysis
Ensure that the *.dbf file is imported before you analyze neighbor relations. The main
functions of the neighbor analysis are listed as follows:
Neighbor relation maintenance and automatic planning

Provides the maintenance function for the neighbor cell relation, such as displaying,
adding, deleting, or modifying adjacent cells.

Provides the automatic planning function for the adjacent cells with the adjacent
relations algorithm based on Huawei's accumulated experience. The planning helps
users to save a lot of time and energy.

Data comparing and restoring function

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Provides the function for comparing engineering parameters, including the


unmodified engineering parameters and the modified ones, comparison between the
unmodified adjacent cell relations and the modified one.

Provides the comparison between planned adjacent cells and configured adjacent
cells.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-17

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.2.2 Maintaining and Auto Planning the Neighbors Relation


Displaying the Neighboring Cells
To display the neighboring cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Neighbor, as shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Neighbor Analysis menu

Step 2 Click the Site View window to select a cell.


The current selected cell and its adjacent cells are marked in different colors (divided to
unidirectional neighbors and bidirectional neighbors), as shown in Figure 5-26.

5-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-26 Neighbors relation effect figure

----End

Adding the Bidirectional Neighbor Cells


To add the bidirectional neighbor cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Bidirectional Neighbors, as
shown in Figure 5-27.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-19

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-27 Adding bidirectional neighbors

Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation.
You can set more than one cell to be the bidirectional adjacent cells of the current cell.
----End

Adding the Unidirectional Adjacent Cells


To add the unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Unidirectional Neighbors,
as shown in Figure 5-27.
Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation.
You can set more than one cell to be the unidirectional adjacent cells of the current cell.
----End

Deleting the Neighbors


To delete the adjacent cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Delete Neighbors, as shown in
Figure 5-27.
Step 2 Click one or multiple cells to be deleted.
You can select more than one neighbor cells to delete the neighbor relations.
----End

Saving Modified Neighbors


Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Save Modified Neighbors to save
the modification of the neighboring cell relation for the cell.

5-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Exporting Neighbors Comparing Results


Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors
Maintenance Result > Last Close to compare the neighbor data with the latest closed
project.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors
Maintenance Result > Last Import to compare the neighbor data with the latest
imported neighbor data.
After the neighboring cell relation of a cell is added or deleted, the system prompts you to save the
neighboring cell relation of this cell first, and then continue with other network optimization operations.

Checking Unidirectional Neighbors


To check the unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Check Unidirectional Neighbors, as shown in Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu

The unidirectional adjacent cell check result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-29.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-21

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-29 Unidirectional neighboring cell check result

Step 2 Right-click the result window to save the check result.


----End

Automatic Planning the Neighboring Cells


The function is performed to automatically figure out the best neighboring cell plan. You can
compare the neighboring cells automatically planned by the system with the neighboring cells
configured in the current network, and set reasonable neighboring cells. For a new network,
you can perform this function to plan the neighboring cells.
To automatically plan the neighboring cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbor Auto Planning, as shown in Figure 5-30
The Neighbor Sector setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-31 and Figure
5-32.

5-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-30 Neighbor Auto Planning menu

Figure 5-31 Antenna Setting tab of the Neighbor Sector setting dialog box

Table 5-3 describes the elements on the Antenna Setting tab.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-23

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Table 5-3 Description of the Antenna Setting tab


Element

Descriptions

Antennas

Lists the existing antennas.

Preview

Lists the following attributes of the selected antennas:


Name
Frequency
Gain
Tile Type
Bound
For different antennas, choose the relevant use range from the
Bound drop-down list.

Button

Add

Adds antennas by importing the antennas file.

Del

Deletes the selected antenna.

Figure 5-32 Property Setting tab of the Neighbor Sector Setting dialog box

Table 5-4 describes the elements in the Property Setting tab.


Table 5-4 Description of the Property Setting tab
Element
Common Property

5-24

Descriptions
Default Grid Size

Enter a number between 50 and 300.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Element
Cell Plan Property

5 Network Optimization

Descriptions
Transmit Power

Enter a number between 1 and 200


respectively for Urban, Suburban, and
Rural.

Site Cover Distance

Enter a number between 1 and 200


respectively for Urban, Suburban, and
Rural.

Min Down Rx

Enter a number between -200 and -20


respectively for Urban, Suburban, and
Rural.

Step 2 Set the properties of antennas based on the description in Table 5-3 and Table 5-4
Step 3 Click OK.
The system performs neighboring cell planning.
To obtain an exact plan result, click
or
on the toolbar of the Site View window to
select an area, as shown in Figure 5-33. Complete the antenna setting and default setting for
the target area, and then start to plan a neighboring cell.
Figure 5-33 Toolbar

----End

The imported engineering parameter table must contain the planprop column and the value can be read
by the system. For example, the value of the planprop column in a cell record must be Urban,
Suburban, or Rural.

The values of Min Down Rx, Site Cover Distance and Transmit Power on the Property
Setting tab affect greatly on neighboring cell planning. Therefore set the three values
carefully.
The best optimization policies for neighboring cell planning are recommended as follows:
Antenna Setting tab:

It is better to import more antennas.

The bound of antenna is assigned based on the planning properties of all imported
cells. The default value of Bound on the Antenna Setting tab is Urban.

If some cells fail to match suitable antennas and fail to be planed, check the planning
properties of the cells and more properties of the antennas.

Property Setting tab:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

The grid size affects the planning speed. When the grid size gets bigger, the planning
speed becomes slower. The default value of the grid size is 50 m.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-25

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Set the value of Transmit Power, Site Cover Distance, Min Down Rx for Urban,
Suburban, and Rural on the Property Setting tab based on the current situation.

The value of Min Down Rx is the most important, and the value decides the
optimization of the planning result. The recommended values are listed in Table 5-5.

Table 5-5 Recommended values for the smallest down-line receiving level
Urban

Suburban

Rural

-80 to -90 dBm

-85 to -95 dBm

-90 to -104 dBm

Exporting the Result of Automatic Neighboring Cell Planning


Using this function, the Nastar can export the result of neighboring cell relation after
automatic planning. The exported result of neighboring cell automatic planning is the latest
planning result of the current project.
To export the result of neighboring cell automatic planning, perform the following steps:
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbor Planning Results, as shown in Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34 Export Neighbor Planning Results menu

The Adjacent cell relation table sheet in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35.

5-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-35 Adjacent cell relation table

Importing the Neighboring Cell Planning Result


To import the neighboring cell planning result, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbor Planning Results, as shown in Figure 5-36.
Figure 5-36 Import Neighbor Planning Results menu

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-27

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

A dialog box for selecting the file of neighboring cell relation is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-37.
Figure 5-37 Please choose upright adjacence relation file to import dialog box

Step 2 Select the engineering parameter file, and click OK.


The Select table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 Select table dialog box

Step 3 Select a table related to the data of neighboring cell planning, and click OK.

5-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

----End

Clearing Planned Neighboring Cell


To clear the planned neighboring cell is mainly to delete all configuration data of the planned
neighboring cell.
To clear the planned neighboring cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Planned Neighbors, as shown in Figure 5-39.
Figure 5-39 Clear Planned Neighbors menu

A dialog box is displayed, prompting you to confirm this operation, as shown in Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40 Confirmation box

Step 2 Click Yes to delete all configuration data of the planned neighboring cell.
----End

5.2.3 Importing the Neighboring Cell Relation


To import the neighboring cell relation, perform the following steps:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-29

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Import Neighbor File, as shown in Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41 Import Neighbor File menu

Step 2 Choose a submenu of Import Neighbors File based on the manufacturer


The dialog box for selecting the corresponding file is displayed.
Step 3 Select the neighboring cell relation file of the manufacturer.
Step 4 Click Open.
If the configuration file of the manufacturer is in .xls format, continue selecting the relevant
sheet of the file.
Step 5 Click OK to import the neighboring cell relation.
----End

5.2.4 Importing Neighboring Cell Relation of the Standard Format


The analysis of the neighboring cell relation is based on the original .dbf file. The neighboring
cell relation is imported to the project using the .dbf file. When the neighboring cell relation
changes, the original neighboring cell relation changes. If network optimization engineers
want to save the optimized neighboring cell relation, they can first save it to an .xls file. The
saved neighboring cell relation can be used for import when it is required.
The data formats are as follows:
Horizontal format
It is used to describe a cell with only one record of the neighboring cells. The number of
fields is alterable. The first field describes the cell, and the following fields describe the
neighboring cells. Each field describes a neighboring cell.
Vertical format
There are only two fields, but the records can be multiple. The import format and export
format must be consistent. It depends on you to choose the format.

5-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Horizontal Import
To import the horizontal format of the neighboring cell relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Horizontal, as
shown in Figure 5-42.
Figure 5-42 Neighbor Analysis menu

The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-43.
Figure 5-43 Please choose level adjacence relation file to import dialog box

Step 2 Select the file of the neighboring cell relation in the horizontal format, and click Open.
The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of
the neighboring cell file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in
the list box, and select the corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, and click
OK.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-31

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

The horizontal neighboring cell importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar
GSM neighboring cell. Only when the two files match, you can import the file successfully. For details,
refer to section 5.2.5 "Exporting and Clearing Neighboring Cell Relation."

Vertical import
To import the vertical format of the neighboring cell relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Vertical, as
shown in Figure 5-42.
The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-44.
Figure 5-44 Please choose upright adjacence relation file import dialog box

Step 2 Select the file of the neighboring cell relation in the vertical format, and click Open.
The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of
the neighboring cell file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in
the list box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, click OK.
----End

The vertical neighboring cell importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM
neighboring cell. Only when the two files match, you can import the file successfully. For details, refer
to section 5.2.5 "Exporting and Clearing Neighboring Cell Relation."

5-32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.2.5 Exporting and Clearing Neighboring Cell Relation


Exporting the Neighboring Cell Relation
To export the neighboring cell relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 5-45.
Figure 5-45 Export Neighbors menu

The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46.


Figure 5-46 Export Neighbors dialog box

Step 2 Select Horizontal or Vertical in Export Format.


Step 3 Select one or multiple items to be displayed: Cell name, LAC, CI, BCCH, and BSIC.
Step 4 Click OK to export the adjacent relation table.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-33

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

If Horizontal is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-47.
If Vertical Export is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-48.
Figure 5-47 Table of horizontal adjacent cells relation in .xls format

Figure 5-48 Table of vertical adjacent cells relation in .xls format

----End

5-34

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Clearing Configured Neighbor Relation


To clear the configured neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Config Neighbors, as shown in Figure 5-49.
Figure 5-49 Clear Config Neighbors menu

The system prompts you to confirm the clearing operation, as shown in Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50 Confirmation box

Step 2 Click OK.


----End

5.2.6 Comparing and Backing Up Data


Comparing Engineering Parameters
To compare the engineering parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Compare Engineering Parameters, as shown in Figure 5-51.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-35

5 Network Optimization

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 5-51 Compare Engineering Parameters menu

Step 2 Choose a submenu of Compare Engineering Parameters.


Choose Last Closed to compare the engineering parameters with the last closed
engineering parameters.
Choose Last Imported to compare the engineering parameter with the last imported
engineering parameters.
The result of comparing engineering parameters is generated in an .xls file, as shown in
Figure 5-52.

5-36

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-52 Result of comparing engineering parameters

Table 5-6 describes the result of comparing engineering parameters


Table 5-6 Description of the result of comparing engineering parameters
Tab

Description

Engineering
Parameters

The system compares the current engineering parameters with the last
closed or last imported parameters
The Engineering Parameters tab shows the record of adding,
deleting, and modifying the engineering parameters, as shown in
Figure 5-53.

Neighbor Record

The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell


relation with the last closed or the last imported one.
The Neighbor Record tab shows the records of adding, deleting, and
modifying the configuration neighboring cell relation, as shown in
Figure 5-54.

Autoplan
Neighbor Record

The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell


relation with the last generated planned neighboring cell relation.
The Autoplan Neighbor tab shows the records of adding, deleting,
and modifying the configuration neighboring cell relation, as shown in
Figure 5-55.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-37

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-53 Engineering Parameters tab

Figure 5-54 Neighbor Record tab

5-38

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-55 Autoplan Neighbor Record tab

----End

Comparing Planned Neighboring Cell with Configured Neighboring Cell


To compare the planned neighboring cell with the configured neighboring cell, perform the
following steps:
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Compare Planned Neighbor with Config, as shown in
Figure 5-56.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-39

5 Network Optimization

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 5-56 Compare Planned Neighbor with Config menu

The result of comparing planned neighboring cell with configured neighboring cell is
generated, as shown in Figure 5-57.

5-40

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-57 Result of comparing planned neighboring cell with configured neighboring cell

Backing Up and Restoring Engineering Parameters


Backing up the engineering parameter table
The system automatically backs up the engineering parameter table after the latest
engineering parameters are imported, and then saves the backup in the database.
Restoring the system with backup record
Discard all changes in the engineering parameters, configuration neighboring cell
relation, and planned neighboring cell relation to recover the parameters to the status of
last imported.

Choose Project > Undo Engineering Parameter Modification > Last Closed to
restore all of the engineering parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and
plan neighboring cell relation to the status of last closed.

Choose Project > Undo Engineering Parameter Modification > Last Imported to
restore all of the engineering parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and
plan neighboring cell relation to the status of last imported.

5.3 Displaying on Map


5.3.1 Finding a Cell
To find a cell, perform the following steps:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-41

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Search Cells.


The Search Cell(s) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-58.
Figure 5-58 Search Cell(s) dialog box

Step 2 Select the search mode.


Select Search by Name to search a cell with the keyword of the cell name. You need to
type only a keyword of the cell name in Keyword to start fuzzy search.
Select Search by CI to search the cell by cell identity. You need to type only the cell
identity of the cell to start exact search.
Step 3 Enter the keyword of a cell or the cell identity in Keyword.
Step 4 The Search Result list shows the information of the result cells: Cell name, CI, Site and Site
Type.
Step 5 Select a result in the Search Result list.
The relevant cell is displayed in the center of the Site View window and all attributes of the
cell are shown in the Property pane on the right side.
The system supports real-time associated display of the cell lists, Site View window, and
Property pane.
----End

5.3.2 Displaying a Location Area


This function is performed to display the location area partition of the current network. For a
network, incorrectly dividing the location area may cause many problems. The incorrect
method for dividing the location area can be:

5-42

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

The boundary of the location area located in the place with many users
The location area divided along heavy traffic road.
Due to the incorrect dividing method, the following problems may be caused:
Signal traffic increasing
Network resource over-occupied
Frequent switch
Switchover failure.
To display the location area, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display LAC.
The Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-59.
Figure 5-59 Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box

Step 2 Set Range Setting.


Select All Network Location Area to show all location areas.
Select Specified Location Area to show a specified location area.
Step 3 Click Color Setting.
The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-60.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-43

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-60 Color Setting dialog box

Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and click
OK.
Step 5 Click OK in the Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box.
It is necessary to check and adjust the partition of the location area, especially view the
partition situation of the current location area with the map information, as shown in Figure
5-61. In the Legend pane, different colors indicate different location areas, the value before
the bracket is the LAC ID, and the value in the bracket is the number of the cells in the LAC
area.

5-44

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-61 LAC Displayed on the map

Based on the map, we can find that three LAC areas of EASTWOOD are embedded in LAC
11012 area. This partition is not reasonable considering network optimization. It may cause
problems such as increase of signal traffic, over-frequent location altering, and switchover
problems. Therefore, it is necessary to modify the location area attribute of EASTWOOD.
----End

The edge of location area relies on cell blocks, so this operation is required to display cell blocks. If this
operation does not work, choose Display on Map > Display Option > Cell Setting to check whether
Display cell blocks is selected.

5.3.3 Displaying the GPRS Cells


This function is performed to view the distribution situation of using GPRS cells in the
current network.
To display the GPRS cells, perform the following steps:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-45

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display GPRS cells.


The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-62.
Figure 5-62 Color Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select the color on the Color Setting dialog box.


Step 3 Click OK.
Figure 5-63 shows the distribution situation of using GPRS cells in the current network.
Figure 5-63 GPRS cells highlighted on the map

The GPRS cells are highlighted in the selected color to distinguish from the non-GPRS cells.
----End

5-46

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.3.4 Displaying the BSC Coverage


This function is performed to view the coverage of the BSC in the current network. This
function provides references for locating the problems of network failure, and provides
information for network optimization, such as solving the switchover problems.
To display the BSC coverage, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display BSC Coverage.
The BSC Display Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-64.
Figure 5-64 BSC Display Setting dialog box

Step 2 Set Range Setting.


Select Whole Network to show all the BSCs in the network.
Select Specified BSC to show the selected BSCs in BSC list.
BSC list is available only when Specified BSC is selected.
Step 3 Click Color Setting.
The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-65.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-47

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-65 Color Setting dialog box

Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and click
OK.
Step 5 Click OK in the BSC Display Setting dialog box
The coverage situation of the selected BSC is highlighted in the selected color, as shown in
Figure 5-66.

5-48

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-66 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map

----End

5.3.5 Displaying All Sites


Choose Display on Map > Display All Sites to display all sites of 900 MHz and 1800 MHz
on the map.
The sites of 900 MHz and 1800 MHz are displayed on the map in different colors and sizes,
as shown in Figure 5-67.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-49

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-67 All sites displayed on the map

The function of cell block and the other functions based on the cell block are applied to a single layer.
The cell blocks are displayed inaccurately when all sites are displayed.

5.3.6 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme


User-defined items in the engineering parameters are defined by users with a value. All
user-defined items of cells are classified and displayed in different colors in the site view.
To display the network optimization theme, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display Network Optimization Theme Setting, as shown in
Figure 5-68.

5-50

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-68 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu

The Show Theme dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-69.


Figure 5-69 Show Theme dialog box

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-51

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Table 5-7 describes the elements in the Show Theme dialog box.
Table 5-7 description of the Show Theme dialog box
Element
Color Setting

Indicator Setting

Description
Start Color

Select the start color.

End Color

Select the end color.

Indicator

Select an indicator (USERDEF1USERDEF 10) to be


colored.

Description

Enter the description of the indicator.

Range Setting
Button

Add legend description and set the lower limit and


upper limit.
Add

Click the button to add a range.

Delete

Click the button to delete the selected range.

Step 2 Edit the elements based on the description in Table 5-7.


Step 3 Click OK to highlight the map of the network optimization theme.
Figure 5-70 shows the result of the highlighted theme.

5-52

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-70 Result of the highlighted theme

The legend window displays the different ranges set by users. The first digital of the number
in a bracket means the number of cells in the 900 MHz layer, and the last digital means the
number of cells in the 1800 MHz layer.
----End

5.3.7 Displaying a Reference Grid


Displaying the reference grid helps to judge the distance between BTSs. The distance of the
reference grid is 500 m by default.
Choose Display on Map >Display Reference Grid, or click
or hide the reference grid.

on the toolbar to display

When the reference grid is displayed, the Site View window is shown in Figure 5-71.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-53

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-71 Display reference grid

5.3.8 Switching 900/1800 Layer


For a dual-band network, generally, it needs to switch 900/1800 layer during network
optimization analysis or traffic statistic analysis.
The screen of the 900 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-72.

5-54

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-72 900 MHz layer

Switch to the 1800 MHz layer, the screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-73.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-55

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-73 1800 MHz layer

Click the relevant cell to display the cell in the center of the map. If the cell does not exist in
the current layer, the system program automatically switches to another level. You can also
switch manually by choosing Display on Map > Switch to layer 900/1800, or clicking
on the toolbar of the map. When the map window is selected, you can also press W to switch
between layers quickly.

In most situations, you can switch between layers of a dual-band network by choosing Display on Map
> Switch to layer 900/1800, or clicking
be continued.

on the toolbar of the toolbar. The previous operations can

5.3.9 Switching to Configuration Neighboring Cells


Choose Display on Map > Switch to Config. Neighbor to switch between configuration
neighboring cells and simulated neighboring cells (automatic planned neighboring cells).

5-56

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

5.3.10 Legend Window


Based on the information of the current map window and operation status, the Legend
window displays relevant hint messages.
Choose View > Display Legend Window, or click
Legend window.

on the toolbar to display or hide the

The Legend window shows different functions.


When a location area is displayed on the system for network optimization analysis, the
Legend window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-74.
Figure 5-74 Legend window during network optimization analysis

During adjacent channel checking, the Legend window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-75.
Figure 5-75 Legend window during adjacent channel checking

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-57

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

In most situations, choose View > Display Legend Window, or click


on the toolbar to display or
hide the Legend window. The content of the Legend window changes based on the operation status.
You can also view or hide the reference grid, task window, navigator window, or cell content by
choosing relevant menus or clicking relevant buttons on the toolbar.

5.3.11 Adding a Map Mark


To add the map mark for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Map Legend > Add Legend, as shown in Figure 5-76.
The mouse pointer turns to a cross pointer.
Figure 5-76 Add Legend

Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window.


The Add Map Mark dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-77.

5-58

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-77 Add Map Mark dialog box

Step 3 Enter a name in the Mark Name field (the mark name is the current cell name by default).
Step 4 Click Add to add the mark.
----End
To select a map legend for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Map Legend > Select Legend.
The Map Mark dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-78.
Figure 5-78 Map Mark dialog box

Step 2 Select a mark.


The program automatically displays the selected mark cell on Site View window.
----End

5.3.12 Importing a Raster Image


To import a raster image, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Import Image Layer.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-59

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

The Open Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-79.
Figure 5-79 Open Raster Image dialog box

Step 2 Select the image, and click Open.


The Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-80.

5-60

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-80 Raster Image dialog box

Step 3 Click the map browse area to select the coordination location (longitude and latitude).
The Click Image to add a point dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-81.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-61

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-81 Click image to add a point dialog box

Step 4 Type a label name in Label, and type values in the Longitude and Latitude fields.
The Pixel X and Pixel Y are calculated by the system based on the map location. Generally,
you do not need to type the value manually.
Step 5 Repeat step 2 and step 3 to edit at least three points that are not in a line.
The precision is much higher when the points are more distributed.
Step 6 Click OK to close the Raster Image dialog box.
The raster image layer is displayed on the map window.
----End

5.3.13 Changing the Show Setting


Cell Show Setting
To set the cell show setting, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display Option > Cell Display Setting.
The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-82.

5-62

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-82 Show Items Option dialog box

Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field to display them on the map.
Site
Site Label
Antenna
Cell Label
Sector
Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field.
If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. Otherwise,
the BTS antenna cannot be displayed. You can set the range based on the antenna density on
the map.
Step 4 Set the showing color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

Operation Instance
This section describes am operation instance for reference.
Problem

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-63

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

When the displaying area is set from minimum range 0 km to maximum range 50 km,
the antenna is displayed too dense on the map. Therefore, it is not good for cells to be
distinguished, as shown in Figure 5-83.
Figure 5-83 Case of a too large displaying area

Solution
You can adjust the range of the displaying area. For example, set the range from
minimum 0 km to maximum 25 km. Then system automatically distinguishes the area
size and the BTS antenna out of the range (0 km 25 km) is not displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-84.

5-64

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-84 Displaying the area range after being corrected

5.3.14 Setting a Cell Label


To set a cell label, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display Option > Cell Label Setting.
The Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-85.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-65

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-85 Option dialog box

Step 2 Set the cell label content in Cell Label.


Step 3 Select Detail Label to display the detailed label.
Step 4 Click Fonts to set the label in Label Option.
Step 5 Click OK to display the cell label on the map.
The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-86.

5-66

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-86 Result figure with the cell label

----End

5.3.15 Setting a Reference Grid


To set a reference grid, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map >Display Option > Reference Grid Setting.
The Grid Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-87.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-67

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-87 Grid Setting dialog box

Step 2 Enter the grid length and select the color.


Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Choose Display on Map >Display Reference Grid, or click
or hide the reference grid.

on the toolbar to display

Displaying a reference grid helps to judge the distance between BTSs. The distance of the
reference grid is 500 m by default.
When the reference grid is displayed, the Site View window is shown in Figure 5-88.

5-68

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-88 Site View window with the reference grid

----End

5.3.16 Setting Huawei Configuration Parameters


To set Huawei configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Display Option > Config Parameter Display Setting.
The Config data show setting dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-89.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-69

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-89 Config data show setting dialog box

Step 2 Select Huawei in the Vendor area.


Step 3 Choose a desired data type in the Type drop-down list.
Step 4 Add or remove the data items in the Selected Config Data list by using items in the All
Config Data list.
Step 5 Click OK.
The Huawei configuration parameters are displayed in the Huawei config Parameter Setting
tab of the Property window, as shown in Figure 5-90.

5-70

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-90 Property window

----End

When the selected cell uses Huawei equipment, the configuration parameter of this cell are Huawei
configuration parameters and the Property window displays the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab.
If the selected cell uses other manufacturer's equipment, the configuration parameters of the cell must be
the configuration parameters of the corresponding manufacture. The Property window displays the
corresponding tab. A cell can be configured with only one manufacturer's configuration parameters.

5.3.17 Setting Alcatel Configuration Parameters


Choose Alcatel in the Vendor area of the Config data show setting dialog box. For other
operations, refer to section 5.3.16 "Setting Huawei Configuration Parameters."

5.3.18 Setting Siemens Configuration Parameters


Choose Siemens in the Vendor area of the Config data show setting dialog box. For other
operations, refer to section 5.3.16 "Setting Huawei Configuration Parameters."

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-71

5 Network Optimization

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5.3.19 Displaying Engineering Parameters on the Map


To render engineering parameters on the map, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Display on Map > Render Project's Parameters.
The Engineering Parameter Select dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-91.
Figure 5-91 Engineering Parameter Select dialog box

Step 2 Select a engineering parameter in Param List.


Step 3 Click Next.
The Color Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-92.

5-72

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-92 Color Config dialog box

Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to set the colors for the selected parameter.
Step 5 Select Effect on antenna or Effect on section in Display Option.
The Effect on section option is selected by default.
Step 6 Click OK to render the map.
The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-93.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-73

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

5 Network Optimization

Figure 5-93 Render the map

----End

5.3.20 Controlling the Map by Mouse and Keyboard


After you click the map, you can zoom in or zoom out the map by rolling the mouse wheel up
and down, or you can also use the
buttons to zoom in or out the map. Use the
buttons to move the map right and left.

5-74

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
6 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Operations About Network Performance Alarms..........................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks.................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Checking and Handling Alarm Tasks...................................................................................................6-4
6.1.3 Creating an Alarm Task........................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.4 Deleting an Alarm Task......................................................................................................................6-10
6.1.5 Modifying an Alarm Task .................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.1.6 Searching a History Alarm Task.........................................................................................................6-13
6.1.7 Setting Conditions for Alarm Filtering ..............................................................................................6-15
6.2 Performance Alarm Task .............................................................................................................................6-17
6.2.1 Standard Alarms.................................................................................................................................6-17
6.2.2 Optional Alarm...................................................................................................................................6-19
6.2.3 Customizing an Alarm .......................................................................................................................6-30

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figures
Figure 6-1 Starting an alarm task .......................................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Suspending an Alarm Task................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Activating an alarm task ...................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-4 Network Trend navigation pane........................................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-5 Warn Operation dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-6 Filling in detailed information of the alarm task...............................................................................6-7
Figure 6-7 Creating an alarm task ......................................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-8 Alarm Template navigation pane ......................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-9 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box .................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-10 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-11 Deleting an alarm task .................................................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6-12 Confirm dialog box about deleting an alarm task ......................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-13 Modifying an alarm task ...............................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-14 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-15 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-16 History Alarm Search dialog box..................................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-17 Alarm window ..............................................................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-18 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu .........................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-19 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-20 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ........................................6-18
Figure 6-21 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-22 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-23 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-24 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-25 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell ...............................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-26 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................6-24

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 6-27 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell ....................................................................................................6-25


Figure 6-28 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell................................................................................6-26
Figure 6-29 Alarm of radio connected cell.......................................................................................................6-27
Figure 6-30 Alarm of successful handover cell ................................................................................................6-28
Figure 6-31 Alarm of rank 1 cell ......................................................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-32 Alarm of average num of idle TCHs in Interfere band 5 ..............................................................6-30

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Tables

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Tables
Table 6-1 Checking alarm messages...................................................................................................................6-5

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Network Performance Alarms

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

6.1 Operations About Network


Performance Alarms

The starting, suspending, activating, querying, handling,


creating, deleting, modifying, filtering the alarm tasks,
and querying of the history alarm tasks.

6.2 Performance Alarm Task

Alarm tasks, including the default settings of the alarm


tasks.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

6.1 Operations About Network Performance Alarms


6.1.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks
Starting an Alarm Task
When the system is started, all alarm tasks are not performed by default. Manual operations
are required.
To execute an alarm task, choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Analysis > Auto
Execute Alarm Task, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Starting an alarm task

Suspending an Alarm Task


Suspending an in-progress alarm task refers to stopping the progress of this alarm task.
To suspend an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Network Trend navigation pane, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.
Step 2 Choose Disabled from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-2.
The Network Trend navigation pane is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.

6-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-2 Suspending an Alarm Task

----End

Activating an Alarm Task


Activating an alarm task refers to executing this alarm task.
To activate an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Network Trend navigation pane, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.
Step 2 Choose Enabled from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-3.
The Network Trend navigation pane is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-3

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-3 Activating an alarm task

----End

6.1.2 Checking and Handling Alarm Tasks


Checking an Alarm Task
To check an alarm task, double-click the alarm task in the Network Trend navigation pane to
view the detailed information about this task, as shown in Figure 6-4.
The navigation pane is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-4.

6-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-4 Network Trend navigation pane

----End
Table 6-1 lists the checking methods, status, and results of each alarm message.
Table 6-1 Checking alarm messages
To

You can

Result

Check
whether an
alarm
message is
generated,

Check the color of the cell


icon in front of the alarm
name.

Green: indicates that there are no alarms.

Red: indicates the alarms are generated


and are followed by the number of the
alarms

Check the
location of
the
problematic
cell,

Click the alarm cell row in


the lower right corner of
the Alarm Message dialog
box.

On the map, the located area turns red.

Check the
detailed
information
about an
alarm task

Double-click the alarm cell


row in the Alarm Message
dialog box of the lower
right corner.

The Warn Operation dialog box that


contains the detailed information of an
alarm task is displayed, as shown in
Figure 6-5.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Alarm Handling
To handle an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click the row standing for the cell where the alarm is generated in the Alarm
Message dialog box.
The Warn Operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Warn Operation dialog box

Step 2 Select an alarm task.


You can enter the information in the Operation Person, Operation Procedure, Operation,
and Demo fields, as shown in Figure 6-6.

6-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-6 Filling in detailed information of the alarm task

----End

6.1.3 Creating an Alarm Task


To create an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click in the Network Trend navigation pane.
The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 Creating an alarm task

Step 2 Choose New Alarm Task from the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-7

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

The Alarm Template is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8.


Figure 6-8 Alarm Template navigation pane

Step 3 In the Alarm Template navigation pane, select an alarm template, and then click Select.
Alternatively, double-click the alarm template to be selected.
The Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-9.

6-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-9 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can set the following parameters:


z

Task name

Time period

Alarm circle

Task state

Start time

Alarm cells

Step 4 In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, click Alarm Condition Setting (K).
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-10.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-9

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-10 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In the Alarm Condition Setting group box, you can add a maximum of three alarm
conditions.
Step 5 After setting the parameters for an alarm, click OK.
An alarm task is created and it is added to the Custom Alarm node in the Network Trend
navigation pane.
----End

6.1.4 Deleting an Alarm Task


To delete an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Network Trend navigation pane, select the alarm to be deleted.
Step 2 Right-click the Network Trend navigation pane, and choose Delete Alarm Task from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-11.

6-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-11 Deleting an alarm task

A confirm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-12.


Figure 6-12 Confirm dialog box about deleting an alarm task

Step 3 Click OK.


----End

Custom alarms can be deleted. Standard and optional alarms, however, cannot be deleted.

6.1.5 Modifying an Alarm Task


To modify an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Network Trend navigation pane, select the alarm to be modified.
Step 2 Right-click the Network Trend navigation pane, and choose Modify Alarm Task from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-11

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-13 Modifying an alarm task

The Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box

In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, you can modify the parameters for the alarm
task.

6-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting.


The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-15.
Figure 6-15 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

You can modify the alarm conditions in the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box.
----End

6.1.6 Searching a History Alarm Task


To search a history alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Network Trend navigation pane, select the alarm to be searched.
Step 2 Right-click the Network Trend navigation pane, and choose History Alarm Query from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-13.
The History Alarm Search dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-16.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-13

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-16 History Alarm Search dialog box

Step 3 In the History Alarm Search dialog box, set the start time and end time in the Start Time
and End Time fields.
Step 4 Search the alarm task based on the key words, such as the task name, the task operator, the
task procedure, the result, and the memo.
The checking result can be displayed in an .xls file or directly exported in an .xls file.
The Alarm window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17.

6-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-17 Alarm window

----End

6.1.7 Setting Conditions for Alarm Filtering


To set conditions for alarm filtering, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Analysis > Alarm Filtrate Setting, as
shown in Figure 6-18.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-15

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-18 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu

The Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-19.
Step 2 Select the cell to be filtered, and then select the KPI to be filtered.
Step 3 Select the KPI items (multiple options) from the KPI group box, and then click Add or
Delete.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Click OK.
The setting of the KPI filtering is complete.

6-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-19 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box

----End

6.2 Performance Alarm Task


The performance alarm can be categorized into the following types:
z

Standard alarms

Optional alarms

Custom alarms

6.2.1 Standard Alarms


Alarm Caused by Carrier Disabled Cell
When the TCH utilization is less than 100%, that is, the TCH utilization < 100%, the alarm
caused by carrier-disabled cell is generated.
The Carrier Frequency Disable Cell Alarm Parameter Cell Alarm Parameter Setting
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-17

6 Network Performance Alarms

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 6-20 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can modify the alarm-triggering conditions according to actual
requirements.

Dormancy Cell Alarm


When the TCH traffic volume per channel is 0 (Erl), the dormancy cell alarm is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-21.

6-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-21 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

6.2.2 Optional Alarm


Alarm of High-Volume Traffic Cell
When the TCH traffic volume per channel is equal to or greater than 0.6 (Erl), that is, the
TCH traffic volume per channel >= 0.6 (Erl), the alarm of high-volume traffic cell is
generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-19

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-22 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of Low-Volume Traffic Cell


When the TCH traffic volume per channel is less than 0.01 (Erl), that is, the TCH traffic
volume per channel < 0.01(Erl), the alarm of low-volume traffic cell is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-23.

6-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-23 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of TCH Congestion Cell


When the TCH congestion rate (including handovers) is greater than 10%, that is, the TCH
congestion rate (including handovers) >= 10%, the alarm of TCH congestion cell is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-24.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-21

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-24 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell


When the SDCCH congestion rate is equal to or greater than 10%, that is, the SDCCH
congestion rate >= 10%, the alarm of SDCCH congestion cell is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-25.

6-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-25 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell

In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of TCH Call Drop Cell


When the TCH call drop rate (including handovers) is equal to or greater than 8%, that is, the
TCH call drop rate (including handovers) >= 8%, the alarm of TCH call drop cell is
generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-26.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-23

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-26 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of SDCCH Call Drop Cell


When SDCCH call drop rate is equal to or greater than 10%, that is, the alarm of the
SDCCH call drop rate >= 10%, the alarm of the SDCCH call drop cell is generated.
You can modify the conditions based on different demands, as shown in Figure 6-27.

6-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-27 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell

Alarm of Immediate Assignment Success Cell


When the immediate assignment success rate is less than 90%, that is, the immediate
assignment success rate < 90%, the alarm of immediate assignment success cell is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-28.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-25

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-28 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell

You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of Radio Connected Cell


When the radio connected rate (including handovers) is equal to or less than 90%, that is, the
radio connected rate (including handovers) < = 90%, the alarm of radio connected cell is
generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-29.

6-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-29 Alarm of radio connected cell

You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of Successful Handover Cell


When the successful handovers is equal to or less than 90%, that is, the successful handovers
<= 90%, the alarm of successful handover cell is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-30.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-27

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-30 Alarm of successful handover cell

You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of Rank 1 Cell


When the rank 1 rate is equal to or greater than 15%, that is, the rank 1 rate >= 15%, the alarm
of rank 1 rate is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-31.

6-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-31 Alarm of rank 1 cell

You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

Alarm of Average Num of Idle TCHs in Interfere Band 5


When the average num of the idle TCHs in interfere band 5 is greater than 0, that is, the
average num of the idle TCHs in interfere band 5 > 0, the alarm of Average num of the idle
TCHs in interfere band 5 is generated.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-32.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-29

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

6 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 6-32 Alarm of average num of idle TCHs in Interfere band 5

You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

6.2.3 Customizing an Alarm


You can also customize alarm tasks.
For details about how to customize alarms, refer to section 6.1.3 "Creating an Alarm Task."

6-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report .......................................................................7-1
7.1 Automatically Generating the Reports ..........................................................................................................7-3
7.1.1 Report Template Wizard ......................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Daily Report ................................................................................................................................................ 7-11
7.2.1 Generating the Daily Report .............................................................................................................. 7-11
7.2.2 Introduction to the Daily Report ........................................................................................................7-16
7.3 Weekly Report.............................................................................................................................................7-19
7.3.1 Generating the Weekly Report ...........................................................................................................7-19
7.3.2 Introduction to the Weekly Report .....................................................................................................7-23
7.4 Monthly Report ...........................................................................................................................................7-27
7.4.1 Generating the Monthly Report .........................................................................................................7-27
7.4.2 Introduction to the Monthly Report ...................................................................................................7-31
7.5 Measurement Report ...................................................................................................................................7-33
7.5.1 Generating the Measurement Report .................................................................................................7-33
7.5.2 Introduction to the Measurement Report ...........................................................................................7-36
7.6 Health Check Report ...................................................................................................................................7-36
7.7 Network Quality Report ..............................................................................................................................7-38
7.7.1 Introduction to the Network Quality Report ......................................................................................7-38
7.7.2 Generating a Network Quality Check Report ....................................................................................7-39
7.8 BSC Network Monitoring Report ...............................................................................................................7-42
7.8.1 Introduction to the BSC Network Monitoring Report........................................................................7-42
7.8.2 Generating the Engineer Report.........................................................................................................7-44
7.9 PCU Network Monitoring Report ...............................................................................................................7-49
7.9.1 Introduction to the PCU Network Monitoring Report .......................................................................7-49
7.9.2 Generating the PCU Network Monitoring Report .............................................................................7-53
7.10 WRO Analysis Report...............................................................................................................................7-56
7.11 Enhanced Traffic Statistics ........................................................................................................................7-61
7.11.1 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics..........................................................................................7-61
7.11.2 Querying the Template of Traffic Statistics......................................................................................7-63

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figures
Figure 7-1 Report customization template dialog box .......................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 KPI Dialog box .................................................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 TOP N dialog box .............................................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-4 Overthreshold dialog box..................................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-5 New List dialog box..........................................................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-6 CHART dialog box ...........................................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-7 WORST CELL dialog box..............................................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-8 Daily Report Analysis option.......................................................................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.............................................................................7-12
Figure 7-10 Advanced tab page of the Daily Report dialog box ......................................................................7-14
Figure 7-11 Cell Group dialog box...................................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-12 New Cell Group dialog box ..........................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-13 Daily report...................................................................................................................................7-16
Figure 7-14 KPI sheet in the Daily Report .......................................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-15 VIC sheet of Daily Report ............................................................................................................7-19
Figure 7-16 Weekly Report Analysis option.....................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-17 Setting tab of the Weekly Report dialog box ................................................................................7-21
Figure 7-18 Advanced tab of the Weekly Report dialog box............................................................................7-22
Figure 7-19 Weekly report................................................................................................................................7-23
Figure 7-20 KPI sheet of Weekly Report..........................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-21 VIC sheet of Weekly Report .........................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-22 Monthly Report Analysis option...................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-23 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box...............................................................................7-28
Figure 7-24 Advance tab of the Monthly Report dialog box............................................................................7-30
Figure 7-25 Monthly report ..............................................................................................................................7-31
Figure 7-26 Measurement Report Analysis option...........................................................................................7-33

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figure 7-27 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box ....................................................................................7-34


Figure 7-28 CarrierAnalyReport ......................................................................................................................7-35
Figure 7-29 Network Health Check Report option...........................................................................................7-36
Figure 7-30 Health Check dialog box...............................................................................................................7-37
Figure 7-31 Network Healthy Report...............................................................................................................7-38
Figure 7-32 Network Quality Check Report option .........................................................................................7-40
Figure 7-33 Network Quality Check Report dialog box...................................................................................7-40
Figure 7-34 GSM Wireless Network Quality Report .......................................................................................7-41
Figure 7-35 Network Monitor Report option ...................................................................................................7-45
Figure 7-36 Network Monitor Report dialog box.............................................................................................7-46
Figure 7-37 Engineer Report of BSC ...............................................................................................................7-48
Figure 7-38 Monitoring Report ........................................................................................................................7-49
Figure 7-39 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report........................................................7-50
Figure 7-40 PCU team leader monitoring report..............................................................................................7-52
Figure 7-41 Analysis Report menu...................................................................................................................7-53
Figure 7-42 PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box....................................................................................7-54
Figure 7-43 Busy Hour Setting dialog box.......................................................................................................7-55
Figure 7-44 WRO Report Analysis option .......................................................................................................7-56
Figure 7-45 WRO Report dialog box ...............................................................................................................7-57
Figure 7-46 Query Object tab of the WRO Report dialog box.........................................................................7-59
Figure 7-47 WRO report ..................................................................................................................................7-60
Figure 7-48 WRO report in OWC mode ..........................................................................................................7-61
Figure 7-49 Report Output dialog box .............................................................................................................7-62
Figure 7-50 Saving template ............................................................................................................................7-63
Figure 7-51 Report output ................................................................................................................................7-64

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Tables

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Tables
Table 7-1 Functions of the buttons .....................................................................................................................7-5
Table 7-2 Settings and functions.........................................................................................................................7-9
Table 7-3 Descriptions of the Setting tab page .................................................................................................7-12
Table 7-4 Descriptions on the Setting tab page ................................................................................................7-28
Table 7-5 Descriptions of the elements on the Time and Object Setting tab page............................................7-34
Table 7-6 Descriptions of Setting tab page in the Health Check dialog box.....................................................7-37
Table 7-7 Descriptions of the elements in the Network Quality Check Report dialog box ..............................7-41
Table 7-8 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report..........................................................................................7-42
Table 7-9 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report .....................................................................................7-43
Table 7-10 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report ...................................................................................7-44
Table 7-11 Descriptions of the Network Monitor Report dialog box ...............................................................7-46
Table 7-12 Sheets in Engineer Report ..............................................................................................................7-51
Table 7-13 Sheets in Team Leader report .........................................................................................................7-52
Table 7-14 Descriptions of the PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box.......................................................7-54
Table 7-15 Descriptions of the Parameter Setting tab in the WRO Report dialog box.....................................7-57

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Generating the Network Monitoring


Report

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

7.1 Automatically Generating


the Reports

The procedure for manually generating the daily, weekly,


and monthly reports.

7.2 Daily Report

The statistics on the network KPI and resource utilization


rate. In this way, you can know the network performance
of a day.

7.3 Weekly Report

The statistics on the network KPI and resource utilization


rate. In this way, you can know the network performance
of a week.

7.4 Monthly Report

The statistics on the network KPI and resource utilization


rate. In this way, you can know the network performance
of a month.

7.5 Measurement Report

Measurements on UL and DL reception level,


measurement based on TA traffic distribution,
measurement on UL and DL link balance.
The measurement report is displayed in .xls format.

7.6 Health Check Report

The measurement on the whole network performance and


on the opinion of users in the VIC area. The health check
report can also reflects the network faults; thus facilitating
engineers' handling of network faults.

7.7 Network Quality Report

The statistics on the BSC KPI. The network quality report


facilitates headquarterss' monitoring on the quality of
each local network.

7.8 BSC Network Monitoring


Report

The statistics on the BSC KPIs. The BSC KPIs includes


call access, call drop, handover, and the performance.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-1

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7-2

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Section

Describes

7.9 PCU Network Monitoring


Report

The statistics on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs includes


call access, call drop, handover, and the performance.

7.10 WRO Analysis Report

The procedure for generating the WRO analysis report.

7.11 Enhanced Traffic


Statistics

The enhanced traffic statistics that can be customized


according to users' requirements.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7.1 Automatically Generating the Reports


For the daily, weekly, or monthly report, the Nastar GSM has the following functions:
z

Customized report
To generate a custom report, choose Performance alarm > report template wizard.

Manual export of daily, weekly, and monthly reports


To manually export the daily, weekly, and monthly reports, choose Performance alarm
> Daily, weekly, and monthly reports. Alternatively, choose Network monitoring >
daily, weekly, and monthly reports.

Generation of daily, weekly, and monthly reports: this function is controlled by


Taskwatcher. For details about the configuration, refer to the Installation Guide to the
Nastar GSM.

7.1.1 Report Template Wizard


To customize the report template, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Performance alarm > Report template wizard.
The Dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-1.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-3

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-1 Report customization template dialog box

Step 2 Click Open to select the template (dayreport.xml, weekreport.xml, or monthreport.xml) to be


customized from the directory \Program Files\Huawei GENEX\Nastar GSM\bin.
You can also select the template that already exists from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click New and set the path for the generated report.
Step 4 Select Day, Week, or Month from the Report Type group box.
Step 5 Set the corresponding properties for Color of Text, Color of Background, Color of Frame,
Report Format, and Font Type.
Step 6 Select KPI, Overthreshold, Worst Cell, TOPN, and Chart from the Report Content group
box.
Step 7 Click Next.
The KPI Dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-2.

7-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-2 KPI Dialog box

Step 8 Select the time ranges for statistics from the Choose Time group box.
Step 9 Choose statistic objects from Capability Index Of KPI.
For details about the buttons of this dialog box, see Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Functions of the buttons
Button

Used to
Add the objects to the statistics field on the right.
Cancel the previous options by selecting the objects to be canceled on the
right.
Select all objects.
Delete all objects that are selected.

Step 10 Select the statistic methods for the KPI by selecting the items from the drop-down list in the
Method field, and then click Next.
The TOP N dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-3.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-5

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-3 TOP N dialog box

Step 11 Type the number for the KPI in the Number field.
Step 12 Select the index to be sorted from Capability Index of TopN, based on the way taken in step
10.
Step 13 Set the statistic method of the previous index, and select the index order from the drop-down
list.
Step 14 Click Next.
The Overthreshold dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-4.

7-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-4 Overthreshold dialog box

The Overhreshold dialog box lists the following operations for the overthreshold list:
z

Creating a list

Editing a list

Deleting a list

To create a list, do as follows:


1.

Click Create List.


The New List dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-5.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-7

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-5 New List dialog box

2.

In the New List dialog box, enter the list name in the List Name field.

3.

Select KPIs from the KPI drop-down list.

4.

Set the value for the Compare Symbol drop-down list.

5.

Click Add to add searching conditions in the field on the left.

6.

You can also select the record in the Search Condition field, and then click Delete to
execute such operation.

7.

Click Save, and go back to Figure 7-4.


Now a new record is added to the Overthreshold dialog box.

8.

Select the statistics objects to be viewed according to the operation in step 10.

9.

Click Save.

The new list is created.


To edit a list, do as follows:
1.

Select the list name that is to be modified in the Overthreshold dialog box, and then
click Edit List.
The New List dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-5.

2.

In the New List dialog box, modify the information on the list in this figure, and click
Save.

3.

Then, go back to the Overthreshold dialog box and select the statistics objects on the
right. Then, click Save.
Now the list editing is complete.

To delete a list, do as follows:


1.

In the Overthreshold dialog box, select the list name to be modified.

2.

Click Delete List.

3.

Click Next.

The CHART dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-6.

7-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-6 CHART dialog box

Step 15 Select CellGroup, BSC, and NET from the Statistic Object group box.
Step 16 In the CHART dialog box, select the index whose charts require to be displayed.
Step 17 Set the items on the right of the dialog box.
For details about the setting of the items and their functions, see Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Settings and functions
Setting Items

Functions

Method

Sets the method for collecting statistics on the desired objects.

Chart

Sets the type of a chart.

View3d

Sets the open status of table marks.

Showlegend

Sets the color description of the table.

Colorindex

Selects the color of the table.

Step 18 Click Next.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-9

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

The WORST CELL dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-7.


Figure 7-7 WORST CELL dialog box

Step 19 In the Capability Index drop-down list, select the index.


Step 20 In the Logic Symbol field drop-down list, determine the logic relation between this index and
the last condition.
Step 21 In the Operator drop-down list, select the operator, and type the value in the Result field.
Step 22 Click Add to execute such an operation.
Step 23 In the Search Condition group box, select the condition.
Step 24 Click Delete.
Step 25 In the Search Index field, select the statistics index of the worst cell.
Step 26 In the Method drop-down list, select the method for collecting statistics on objects.
Step 27 Click Finish.
Now the daily, weekly, and monthly report templates are generated.
----End

7-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7.2 Daily Report


7.2.1 Generating the Daily Report
To generate the daily report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Daily Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 7-8. Alternatively,
click

in Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Figure 7-8 Daily Report Analysis option

The Daily Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-9.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-11

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box

Table 7-3 describes the elements on the Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.
Table 7-3 Descriptions of the Setting tab page
Element

Description

Report Saved Path Setting

7-12

Click
report.

to select a path for saving the daily

Query Object

BSC

Select the BSC to be queried.

Time Set

Date

Set the date to be queried.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Element

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Description
All Day
Time

Select All Day Time to generate the report of the


whole day.

Busy Time

Select Busy Time to generate the report during


busy hours.
NOTE
Click Modify Busy Time to open the Busy Time Set
dialog box. Set the begin time and end time in the Busy
Time Set dialog box.

Step 2 Set a path for saving the daily report. Select the BSC to be queried, and set the time to be
queried on the Setting tab page.
Step 3 Click Advanced tab in the Daily Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-13

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-10 Advanced tab page of the Daily Report dialog box

Step 4 Type a value in TopN. Set conditions for the busy or free cell and set property for the worse
cell.
Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups as the VIC cell group in the VIC list.
To add more cell groups, do as follows:
1.

7-14

Click Cell Group Manage to open the Cell Group dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-11.
In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add, delete, or modify cell groups listed in the
Cell Group box.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-11 Cell Group dialog box

2.

Click New to create a cell group.


The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12 New Cell Group dialog box

3.

In the New Cell Group dialog box, type a cell group name, and select the cells to be
added to the group.

4.

Click OK in the New Cell Group dialog box.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-15

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Step 6 After setting the report, click OK in the Daily Report dialog box.
The daily report is generated, as shown in Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 Daily report

----End

7.2.2 Introduction to the Daily Report


The daily report mainly includes following sheets:
z

Cover
The heading consists of the name of the report and the date, for example, Performance
Daily Report 24 Aug 2005. The date indicates the date when the daily report indicators
are recorded, not the date when the daily report is generated. The vendor name is also on
the cover. In this case, the vendor name is Huawei.

KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance, as shown in Figure 7-14. The font of the indicators turns red if any
exceptions occur.
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

7-16

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%

TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%

Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%

IntraBSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

IntraBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%

OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%

IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%

TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%

SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%

TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%

Call Drop Rate < 80%

SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%

TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%

SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)

Figure 7-14 KPI sheet in the Daily Report

BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole day or busy hours), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells,
and sort them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a
new value to N (1<= N <=20).

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

VIC

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-17

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

The font of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exceptions occur.
The scenarios and the changes of font are listed as follows:

7-18

Red: if the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: if the
92% <= Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true.

Red: if the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: if 92% <=
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true

Red: if the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: if 88%
<= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true.

Red: if 0 <= IntraBSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: if 90% <
IntraBSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true.

Red: if 0 <= IntraBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is
true. Orange: if 92% <= IntraBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons
< 95.5% is true.

Red: if 0 <= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: if 85%
<= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: if 0 <= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 88%
is true. Orange: if 88% <= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is true.

Red: if 0 <= IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: if 85%
<= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: if 0 <= IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 85%
is true. Orange: if 85% <= IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio
Reasons < 90% is true.

Red: if 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange:
if 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.

Red: if 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) = 88% is true. Orange:
if 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% is true.

Red: if 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: if 1% <=
TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true.

Red: if 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: if 1% <= SDCCH
Call Drop Rate < 2% is true.

Red: if 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: if 0.8% <=
TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true.

Red: if 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: if 2% <= TCH
Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true.

Red: if 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: if 95% <= TCH Loss
Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true.

Red: if 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: if 95% <= SDCCH
Availability Rate < 98% is true.

Red: if 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: if 1%
<= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true.

Red: if 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: if
0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true.

Red: if 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: if 0.5% <= TCH
Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-15 VIC sheet of Daily Report

Hot Cell
According to the whole traffic of the cell in busy hour, the Nastar GSM finds the Top10
busiest cells for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs. If a cell is a VIC cell, the
background of the cell is highlighted in yellow.

Extra Busy_Idle
The Nastar GSM lists all extra-busy and extra-idle cells, and displays the related KPIs.

Worst Cell
The Nastar GSM lists the worst cell for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs.

All-Day Traffic Trend


For the whole network and each BSC, the Nastar GSM collects the statistics of the
whole-day traffic by hour.

7.3 Weekly Report


7.3.1 Generating the Weekly Report
To generate the weekly report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Weekly Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 7-16. Alternatively,
click

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-19

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-16 Weekly Report Analysis option

The Weekly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-17.

7-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-17 Setting tab of the Weekly Report dialog box

Step 2 Set a path for saving the weekly report. Select the BSC to be queried, and set the time range to
be queried on the Setting tab page.
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Weekly Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-18.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-21

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-18 Advanced tab of the Weekly Report dialog box

Step 4 Type a value in the TopN. Set conditions for busy or idle cell and set property for the worse
cell.
Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups as VIC cell groups in the VIC.
For details about how to set the cell groups, refer to section 7.1
the Reports."

"Automatically Generating

Step 6 After the setting of the report, click OK in the Weekly Report dialog box.
The weekly report is generated, as shown in Figure 7-19.

7-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-19 Weekly report

----End

7.3.2 Introduction to the Weekly Report


The weekly report mainly includes the following sheets:
z

KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance, as shown in Figure 7-20. The values of the associated indicators
are the whole statistical result of the seven days. The font of the indicators turns red if
any exceptions occur.
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%

TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%

Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%

Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%

Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%

Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-23

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%

TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%

SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%

TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%

Call Drop Rate < 80%

SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%

TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%

SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)

Figure 7-20 KPI sheet of Weekly Report

BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole-week statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells, and
sorts them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a
new value to N (1<= N <=20).

VIC
The font of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exceptions occur.
The scenarios and the changes of font are listed as follows:

7-24

Red: if the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: if the
92% <= Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Red: if the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: if 92% <=
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true

Red: if the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: if 88%
<= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true.

Red: if 0 <= IntraBSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: if 90% <
IntraBSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true.

Red: if 0 <= IntraBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is
true. Orange: if 92% <= IntraBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons
< 95.5% is true.

Red: if 0 <= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: if 85%
<= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: if 0 <= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 88%
is true. Orange: if 88% <= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is true.

Red: if 0 <= IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: if 85%
<= OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: if 0 <= IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 85%
is true. Orange: if 85% <= IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio
Reasons < 90% is true.

Red: if 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange:
if 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.

Red: if 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) = 88% is true. Orange:
if 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900)< 92.5% is true.

Red: if 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: if 1% <=
TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true.

Red: if 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: if 1% <= SDCCH
Call Drop Rate < 2% is true.

Red: if 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: if 0.8% <=
TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true.

Red: if 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: if 2% <= TCH
Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true.

Red: if 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: if 95% <= TCH Loss
Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true.

Red: if 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: if 95% <= SDCCH
Availability Rate < 98% is true.

Red: if 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: if 1%
<= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true.

Red: if 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: if
0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true.

Red: if 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: if 0.5% <= TCH
Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-25

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-21 VIC sheet of Weekly Report

All-Day Traffic Trend


This sheet contains the weekly traffic trend of the whole network and of each BSC.

Radio Completion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the radio completion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

Call-Drop Rate Trend


This sheet is about the call-drop rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.

TCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

TCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

SDCCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC
in busy hour.

CPU Overload Trend


This sheet is about the CPU overload trend of each BSC in busy hour.

7-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7.4 Monthly Report


7.4.1 Generating the Monthly Report
To generate the monthly report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Monthly Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 7-22.
Alternatively, click

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Figure 7-22 Monthly Report Analysis option

The Monthly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-23.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-27

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-23 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box

Table 7-4 describes the elements on the Setting tab page of the Monthly Report dialog box.
Table 7-4 Descriptions on the Setting tab page
Element

Description

Report Saved Path Setting

7-28

Click
report.

to select a path for saving the monthly

Query Object

BSC

Select the BSC to be queried.

Time Set

Date

Set the date to be queried.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Element

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Description
All Day
Time

Select All Day Time to generate the report of each


day in a month

Busy
Time

Select Busy Time to generate the report of busy hours


in a month.
NOTE
Click Modify Busy Time to view the Busy Time Set dialog
box. Set the begin time and end time in the displayed Busy
Time Set dialog box.

Step 2 Set a path for saving the monthly report.


Step 3 Select the BSC to be queried, and set the time to be queried on the Setting tab page.
Step 4 Click the Advanced tab in the Monthly Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-24.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-29

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-24 Advance tab of the Monthly Report dialog box

Step 5 Type a value in the TopN to display the first N records.


Step 6 Click OK in the Monthly Report dialog box.
The monthly report is generated, as shown in Figure 7-25.

7-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-25 Monthly report

----End

7.4.2 Introduction to the Monthly Report


The monthly report mainly includes the following sheets:
z

KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance. The indicators suggest the performance of the last day in one
month. The font of the associated indicators turns red if any exceptions occur.
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%

TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%

Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%

IntraBSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

IntraBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%

OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

OutgoingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%

IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

IncomingBSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-31

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%

TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%

SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%

TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%

Call Drop Rate < 80%

SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%

TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%

SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)

BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole-month statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the worst N cells, and sorts
them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a new
value to N (1<= N <=20).

Worst Cell
This sheet lists worst cells in the last day of a month, and the frequency of a cell that
turns into the worst cell.

All-Day Traffic Trend


This sheet is about the all-day traffic of the whole network and of each BSC.

Radio Completion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the radio completion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

Call-Drop Rate Trend


This sheet is about the call-drop rate in busy hour of the whole network and of the each
BSC.

TCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

TCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

SDCCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and
of each BSC.

CPU Overload Trend


This sheet is about the CPU overload rate in busy hour of each BSC.

7-32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7.5 Measurement Report


7.5.1 Generating the Measurement Report
To generate the measurement report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Measurement Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 Measurement Report Analysis option

The Measurement Report Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-27.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-33

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-27 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box

Table 7-5 describes the elements on the Time and Object Setting tab page in the
Measurement Report Analysis dialog box.
Table 7-5 Descriptions of the elements on the Time and Object Setting tab page
Element

7-34

Description

File Output

Save path

Time Setting

Start date

Set the begin time of a query.

End date

Set the end time of a query.

Busy hour

Set a period of a day.

to select a path for saving the


Click
measurement report.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Element

Object

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Description
Full Rate

Query by full rate.

Half Rate

Query by half rate.

BSC

Lists the objects selected by BSC.

Cell

Lists the objects selected by cell.

Cell group

Lists the objects selected by cell group.

Step 2 Select the path for saving the measurement report.


Step 3 Set the date range, and the period in each day (for example, from 0 to 24) on the Time and
Object Setting tab page.
Step 4 Select objects of BSC, of Cell, or of Cell Group. And select objects from the Object
drop-down list.
Step 5 Click the Default Setting tab in the Measurement Report Analysis dialog box.
You can change the setting on the Default Setting tab page, or just leave it as the default.
Step 6 Click OK.
The CarrierAnalyReport is generated, as shown in Figure 7-28.
Figure 7-28 CarrierAnalyReport

----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-35

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7.5.2 Introduction to the Measurement Report


The measurement report mainly includes the following sheets:
z

BSC summary analysis

BSC measurement data diagram

Malfunction carrier diagram

7.6 Health Check Report


Huawei recommends that you import the BSC performance data table, and configuration data
table before enabling the health check function.
To generate the network health check report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Health Check Analysis, as shown in Figure 7-29.
Alternatively, click

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Figure 7-29 Network Health Check Report option

The Health Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-30.

7-36

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-30 Health Check dialog box

Table 7-6 describes the elements of Setting tab page in the Health Check dialog box.
Table 7-6 Descriptions of Setting tab page in the Health Check dialog box
Element
Parameter Setting

Description
Save path

to select a path for saving the Network


Click
health report.

Report Date

Set the query date for the report.

Busy Hour

Set busy hour.

TopN

Type in a value. For example, input 10 in the TopN


box to display the first 10 records.

VIC

Select a VIC group from the list.

Cell Groups

Click Cell Groups to view the Cell Group dialog


box. You can add a cell group by clicking New.
Alternatively, you can delete or modify cell groups
listed in the Cell Group dialog box.

Step 2 Set the parameter setting, and select the VIC group to be queried.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-37

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Step 3 Click the Object tab, and select the BSC to be queried.
Step 4 Click OK in the Health Check dialog box.
The network healthy report is generated, as shown in Figure 7-31.
Figure 7-31 Network Healthy Report

If you do not select the BSC on the Object tab page in the Health Check dialog box, the network
performance check focuses on all the BSCs. If VIC cell groups are not selected, the generated result
gives the message that you have not selected VIC cell groups to be checked.

----End

7.7 Network Quality Report


7.7.1 Introduction to the Network Quality Report
The network quality report is generated according to statistical evaluation of the key
indicators of BSC traffic measurement. The quality report helps the monitoring department in
headquarters to evaluate the network quality of each region.
z

Date range and ranges of busy time in report statistics


The date range and busy period in the report are configured in the BSCUniversial.xml
file in the template directory instead of being set according to begin time and end time of
the traffic measurement. Set a busy-time period for provision. Since different network
regions have different busy time period, the headquarters sets different busy time period
for different regions in advance.

7-38

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual
z

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

BSC level definition


Different network scales (with different number of users, BTS, and carriers) and different
area coverage greatly influence network indicators. According to the network scale and
particularity, the BSCs are classified into four levels: A, B, C, and D. Each level of the
BSCs is configured in the BSCUniversial.xml configuration file.

BSC score
The indicators set in the configuration file include network quality and Network-level
KPIs. Then, according to the configuration file set by headquarters, calculate a score for
each KPI. Gather the scores of all the KPIs to calculate the score of the entire BSC. If
some KPIs fail to pass, they are highlighted in color in the evaluation report.
Meanwhile, you can select the reasons for the failure of some KPIs and type in the
failure causes in a convenient way. The reasons and types of the KPIs failure can be
modified later.

The network quality, BSC measurement dates and measurement busy time, and measurement
cycle type are all uniformly configured by the headquarters that provides an editing tool for
the XML configuration file.
Use the editing tool, and you can:
z

Construct a network according to the network naming method of the company.

Edit the configuration of evaluation report.

Set the configuration data of network and BSC.

Based on the operations described previously, you can generate an evaluation report according
to the configuration file.

7.7.2 Generating a Network Quality Check Report


To generate a network quality check report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Quality Check Report, as shown in Figure 7-32.
Alternatively, click

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-39

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-32 Network Quality Check Report option

The Network Quality Check Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-33.
Figure 7-33 Network Quality Check Report dialog box

Table 7-7 describes the elements in the Network Quality Check Report dialog box.

7-40

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Table 7-7 Descriptions of the elements in the Network Quality Check Report dialog box
Element
Set save path

Description
to select a path for saving the Network quality
Click
check report.

Please select object

Select objects to be queried from the list.

Edit Reason

Click Edit Reason to view the View Item Fail Reason dialog
box and reasons for the failure of indicators.

Query

Click Query to query network quality of the selected objects.

Step 2 Select a path for saving the network quality check report.
You can create a path or select an existing directory.
Step 3 Select one or multiple BSCs to be queried.
If you select multiple BSCs, the quality reports of multiple BSCs can be generated at the same
time.
Step 4 Click Query.
The network quality report is generated, as shown in Figure 7-34. In addition, you can add the
reasons for the failure of indicators in the quality report.
Figure 7-34 GSM Wireless Network Quality Report

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-41

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Step 5 Click Modify in the network quality report to modify the failure causes in the report, and then
click Submit to save the modifications.
----End

7.8 BSC Network Monitoring Report


7.8.1 Introduction to the BSC Network Monitoring Report
According to statistical analysis on KPIs of the BSC traffic measurement, the Nastar GSM
generates a monitoring report to help engineers in different regions and in the headquarters to
familiarize themselves with the performance of each sub-network in the global network.
The monitoring report can be categorized into the following types:
z

Engineer monitoring report

Team leader monitoring report

Comparison monitoring report

Engineer Monitoring Report


The engineer monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs and cell KPIs. The default
statistical period is seven days. You can set the period for collecting statistics. A report is
generated based on each selected BSC. If you plan to select several BSCs, several engineer
monitoring reports are generated at the same time.
Table 7-8 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report

7-42

Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the selected BSC:


z

Project name

BSC ID

BSC IP address

Numbers of BSCs and cells

BSC version

Network project stage

Time and period for the statistical data

Performance data

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analysis of the related KPIs

BSC KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the
trend of each KPI in a chart.

TopN cells with


exceptional KPIs

Lists TopN cells. If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be
labeled. The TopN cells are sorted based on the first indictor. Detailed
analysis is also provided in the associated links.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Sheet

Description

TopN cells with


exceptional
indicators

Provides detailed analysis on the TopN cells with exceptional


indicators. These indicators include accessibility, handover, traffic,
resource utilization rate, and call drop.
If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be labeled. The
analysis should cover failure analysis, service analysis, and process
analysis.

VIC KPI

Lists the value of each indicator in the period of statistics collection.

Readme

Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the
display modes for actual KPI values.

Team Leader Monitoring Report


The team leader monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs in the entire network. The
default statistical period is seven days. You can set a period for the statistics collection.
A team leader monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.
Table 7-9 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the following
items:
z

Project name

BSC ID

BSC IP address

Numbers of BTSs and cells

BSC version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

Performance data

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analysis of the related KPIs

BSC KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend
of each KPI in a chart.

Readme

Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display
modes for actual KPI values.

Comparison Monitoring Report


The comparison monitoring report is used to give the changes of the BSC KPI of different
statistical periods. You need to set the start date and measurement period for both the

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-43

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

comparison and the statistics collection. The default statistical period is seven days. You can
set a period for the statistics collection.
A comparison monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.
Table 7-10 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the


following items:
z

Project name

BSC ID

BSC IP address

Numbers of BTSs and cells

BSC version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

KPI trend

Exceptional KPIs

BSC KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend
of each KPI in a chart.

Readme

Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display
modes for actual KPI values.

7.8.2 Generating the Engineer Report


To generate engineer report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 7-35.
Alternatively, click

7-44

in Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-35 Network Monitor Report option

The Network Monitor Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-36.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-45

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-36 Network Monitor Report dialog box

Table 7-11 describes the elements in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
Table 7-11 Descriptions of the Network Monitor Report dialog box
Item
File Output

BSC

7-46

Description
Save Path

Click
to select a save path for the network
monitoring report. Alternatively, you can use the
default directory.
Select the BSC to be queried from the BSC list.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Item
VIC

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Description
Cell Group
Management

You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through


Group Management. Click Cell Group
Management to view the Cell Group dialog box.
In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add a cell
group by clicking New. You can also delete, or
modify cell groups listed in the Cell Group box.

VIC list
Report Type

Select the VIC cell group to be queried from the


VIC list.
Select the associated option based on your
requirement.

Statistic Date

Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer


report.

Select Team Leader Report to generate a team


leader report.

Select Compare Report to generate a compared


report.

Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date


and End Date fields.
Type a value in the Statistic Cycle (days) field.
The value must be an integer within the range from
1 to 31.
NOTE
If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the
system prompts you to enter a valid value.

Statistic Time

All-Day

Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day.

Busy Hour

Select Busy Hour to generate a report for


busy-hour traffic.
Click Change Busy Hour to view Busy Hour
Setting dialog box, and set the busy hour.

Other Time

Select Other Time to generate a report for traffic in


other time periods.

Step 2 Select Engineer Report in the Report Type group box. Set the other parameters in the
Network Monitor Report dialog box based on the descriptions in the table.
Step 3 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
z

The Engineer Report result is generated, as shown in Figure 7-37.

The Monitoring Report result is generated, as shown in Figure 7-38.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-47

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-37 Engineer Report of BSC

7-48

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-38 Monitoring Report

----End

Select Team Leader Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box
to generate a team leader report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.
Select Compare Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box to
generate a comparison report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.

7.9 PCU Network Monitoring Report


7.9.1 Introduction to the PCU Network Monitoring Report
The PCU network monitoring report is categorized into the following types:
z

Engineer Report

Team Leader Report

The PCU network monitoring report aims at monitoring the KPIs of a cell. The default
statistical period is one day. You can modify the default period according to your requirements.
The PCU network monitoring report is generated according to the selected PCU. Each PCU

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-49

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

generates one report. You can select multiple PCUs at a time and obtain multiple team leader
reports.

PCU Engineer Monitoring Report


The Engineer Report of PCU network monitoring is generated based on the selected PCU.
Figure 7-39 shows the engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report.
Figure 7-39 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report

Table 7-12 describes the sheets in the Engineer Report.

7-50

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Table 7-12 Sheets in Engineer Report


Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the statistic PCU:


z

Project name

PCU ID

PCU IP address

Numbers of BSCs and cells

PCU version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

Performance data

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analysis of the related KPIs

PCU KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the
trend of each KPI in a chart.

TopN

Lists Top10 cells and their related indicators.

Accessibility

Lists the cell name and time of the Top10 cells and their related
indicators.

Retainability

Lists the cell name and time of the Top10 cells and their related
indicators.

Throughput(Um)

Lists the cell name and time of the Top10 cells and their related
indicators.

Throughput(Gb)

Lists the cell name and time of the Top10 cells and their related
indicators.

Resource
Utilization

Lists the cell name and time of the Top10 cells and their related
indicators.

CELL KPI

Lists the detailed performance indicator for all of the VIC cells.

PCU Team Leader Monitoring Report


The Team Leader Report of PCU network monitoring report is displayed, as shown in
Figure 7-40.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-51

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-40 PCU team leader monitoring report

Table 7-13 describes the sheets in the Team Leader report.


Table 7-13 Sheets in Team Leader report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the statistic PCU. The information includes the following
items:

PCU KPI

7-52

Project name

PCU ID

PCU IP address

Numbers of BTSs and cells

PCU version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

Performance data

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analysis of the related KPIs

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of
each KPI in a chart.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

7.9.2 Generating the PCU Network Monitoring Report


To generate the PCU network monitoring report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Report > PCU Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 7-41.
Figure 7-41 Analysis Report menu

The PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-42.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-53

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-42 PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box

Table 7-14 describes the elements in the PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box.
Table 7-14 Descriptions of the PCU Network Monitor Report dialog box

7-54

Element

Description

File Output

Click
to select a save path for Network monitoring report.
Alternatively, you can use the default directory.

PCU

Select PCU from the PCU list.

Report Type

Select the associated option based on your requirement.


z

Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report.

Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Element

Description

Statistic Date

Select the begin date and end date in the Begin Date and End Date
fields.
Type a value in the Compare Cycle(days) field. The value must be an
integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE
If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to enter a
valid value.

Statistic Time

All-Day

Select All-Day to generate a whole-day report.

Busy
Hour

Select Busy Hour to generate a busy-hour report.


Click Change Busy Hour to modify the busy hour.
NOTE
Click Change Busy Hour.
The Busy Hour Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
7-43.

Other
Time

Select Other Time to generate a report of the statistics in


other periods.

Figure 7-43 Busy Hour Setting dialog box

Step 2 Set the parameters of the Network Monitor Report dialog box, as described in Table 7-14.
Step 3 Click OK on the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
The Network Monitor Report is generated based on the settings in the Network Monitor
Report dialog box.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-55

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

If Engineer Report is selected in the Network Monitor Report dialog box, the engineer report is
displayed, as shown in Figure 7-39.

If Team Leader Report is selected in the Network Monitor Report dialog box, the team leader
report is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-40.

----End

7.10 WRO Analysis Report


To generate the WRO analysis report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > WRO Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 7-44.
Figure 7-44 WRO Report Analysis option

The WRO Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-45.

7-56

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-45 WRO Report dialog box

Table 7-15 describes the elements in the Parameter Setting tab page in the WRO Report
dialog box.
Table 7-15 Descriptions of the Parameter Setting tab in the WRO Report dialog box
Item

Description

Date Setting

Set the begin date and the end date.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-57

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Item
Settings

Description
BH Traffic Stat.Mode

Set the Stat.Mode for traffic


measurement during busy hours.

Capa_Cell Expansion Figure (%)

Refers to the figure for capability


cell expansion.

Cov_Cell Expansion Figure (%)

Refers to the figure for coverage cell


expansion.

TCH Margin

Refers to the margin of traffic


channels.

TCHs per TRX

Refers to the number of TCH


channels per TRX.

Capa_Cell Definition

Refers to the definition of the


capability cell.

Erl_B GOS(%)

Show Mode

Displays in Excel report or OWC


control.

Step 2 Set the begin date and end date in the Date Setting area of the Parameter Setting tab page.
Step 3 Set other parameters in the Setting area of the Parameter Setting tab page.
Step 4 Click the Query Object tab.
The Query Object tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-46.

7-58

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-46 Query Object tab of the WRO Report dialog box

Step 5 Select Object Type on the Query Object tab.


z

If BSC is selected, the query objects are listed by BSC.

If Cell Group is selected, the query objects are listed by cell group.

Step 6 Select objects from the Object Type drop-down list.


Step 7 Click OK.
z

If EXCEL is set as display mode, the Wireless Resource Optimization (WRO) report is
generated, as shown in Figure 7-47.

If OWC is set as display mode, the WRO report is generated, as shown in Figure 7-48.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-59

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-47 WRO report

7-60

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Figure 7-48 WRO report in OWC mode

----End

7.11 Enhanced Traffic Statistics


Enhanced traffic statistics can be customized based on various demands of different customers.
Using this method, you can execute the arithmetic operation, including summing up, average,
maximum, and minimum, according to dates, time period, cells, cell groups, and different
categories of BSCs.
The enhanced traffic statistics involves the following two operations:
z

Setting the template of traffic statistics

Querying the template of traffic statistics

7.11.1 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics


To set the template of traffic statistics, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Performance Analysis > Enhanced Traffic Statistics
The Report Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-49.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-61

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-49 Report Output dialog box

Step 2 Setting the following parameters:


z

Statistic Object
Including three types: cell, cell group, and BSC
If a cell is selected, the information listed in the combo box is that of the cell. The entire
template statistics is based on the selected cell. Likewise, if a cell group or a BSC is
selected, the listed information is about the previous indexes respectively.

Choose Index
Multiple indexes can be chosen. Each has different algorithm such as summing up,
average number. The indexes vary with the statistic date and time.

7-62

Type

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

Whole: refers to the arithmetic operation to the selected range of time. The result is a
generated record. The algorithm for each index varies, basing on different settings for
the arithmetic operations, such as summing up and maximum.

List: refers to the detailed information of the selected range of time. For example,
from eight to twelve, 4 detailed messages are generated.

Actual Busy Hour: refers to the hour that experiences the busiest traffic.

Report Output Type:

Horizontal Form: refers to the report output in the form of a horizontal table by hour

Vertical Form: refers to the report output in the form of a vertical table by hour.

For some frequently used templates, click Save on the upper right corner, as shown in Figure
7-50.
Figure 7-50 Saving template

For the templates that are no more used, perform the following step:
Choose Performance Analysis > Frequently Used Statistic Template, and then click Delete on the
upper right corner.

----End

7.11.2 Querying the Template of Traffic Statistics


Querying the template of traffic statistics involves the following frequently used operations:
z

Querying the frequently used template


Choose Performance Analysis > Frequently Used Template, and select the required
template. In the displayed dialog box, click Report Output at the bottom.

Querying the temporarily used template


Choose Performance Analysis > Enhanced Traffic Statistics.
At the prompt, type the methods of data statistics accordingly, and then click Report
Output at the bottom of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-51.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-63

7 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figure 7-51 Report output

7-64

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
8 Further Locating Network Problems......................................................................................8-1
8.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance....................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Analyzing BSC-Level KPI...................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Analyzing the BSC Overall Performance.............................................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell.............................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis...............................................................................8-5
8.1.5 Customizing the Cell Filter ..................................................................................................................8-6
8.1.6 Analyzing the TOPN Cells...................................................................................................................8-8
8.1.7 Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell ................................................................................8-10
8.1.8 Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells ...........................................................................................................8-12
8.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs.......................................................................................................8-14
8.2.1 Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)...................................................................8-14
8.2.2 Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis (PS).....................................................................8-14
8.2.3 Customizing the Cell Filter (PS) ........................................................................................................8-15
8.2.4 Analyzing TopN Cells (PS)................................................................................................................8-15
8.2.5 Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell (PS) ........................................................................8-15
8.2.6 Analyzing the Extra Bad Cell (PS).....................................................................................................8-15
8.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility .................................................................................................................8-15
8.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance....................................................................................................8-17
8.5 Analyzing the Mobility Performance ..........................................................................................................8-19
8.5.1 Analyzing the Intercell Handover ......................................................................................................8-19
8.5.2 Analyzing the Outgoing Intercell Handover ......................................................................................8-21
8.5.3 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors .................................................................................................8-21
8.5.4 Analyzing the Missing Neighbors......................................................................................................8-21
8.5.5 Analyzing the Outgoing Intercell Handover (BSC6000) ...................................................................8-22
8.5.6 Analyzing the Redundant Neighboring Cells (BSC6000)..................................................................8-22
8.5.7 Analyzing the Missing Neighboring Cells (BSC6000) ......................................................................8-22
8.6 Analyzing the Measurement Performance...................................................................................................8-22
8.6.1 Analyzing the Measurement Report...................................................................................................8-22
8.6.2 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance ...........................................................................8-22
8.7 Analyzing the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio ...........................................................................................8-23
8.7.1 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell ...........................................................................................8-23

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual
8.7.2 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells .........................................................................................................8-25
8.7.3 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells ...........................................................................................................8-26
8.7.4 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours..........................................................................................8-26

8.8 Checking Parameters...................................................................................................................................8-26


8.9 Customizing the Analysis Settings ..............................................................................................................8-26
8.9.1 Managing the Cell Groups .................................................................................................................8-26
8.9.2 Setting the Common Period ...............................................................................................................8-30
8.9.3 Synchronizing the Server ...................................................................................................................8-31
8.10 Analyzing the Query Result ......................................................................................................................8-32
8.10.1 Drawing Instantly.............................................................................................................................8-33
8.10.2 Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File .....................................................................................8-34
8.10.3 Querying the Traffic Statistics..........................................................................................................8-34
8.10.4 Printing the Query Results ...............................................................................................................8-36
8.10.5 Controlling the Query Result Data...................................................................................................8-36
8.10.6 Summing Up the Selected Area .......................................................................................................8-37
8.10.7 Sorting the Results ...........................................................................................................................8-37
8.10.8 Filtering the Query Results ..............................................................................................................8-38
8.10.9 Tiling the Window............................................................................................................................8-39
8.10.10 Creating a Cell Group ....................................................................................................................8-40
8.10.11 Setting the Outgoing Inter-Cell Display.........................................................................................8-41
8.10.12 Setting the Geographical Display for Traffic Statistics ..................................................................8-43

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Figures

Figures
Figure 8-1 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box..................................................................................................8-2
Figure 8-2 Busy Time Modify dialog box ..........................................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-3 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box.................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-4 Busy Time Modify dialog box ..........................................................................................................8-5
Figure 8-5 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box ..................................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-6 Query Filter Condition dialog box....................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-7 Busy Time Modify dialog box ..........................................................................................................8-8
Figure 8-8 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box .........................................................................................................8-9
Figure 8-9 Busy Time Modify dialog box ........................................................................................................8-10
Figure 8-10 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box .................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-11 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-12 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box ..............................................................................................8-13
Figure 8-13 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................8-14
Figure 8-14 Cell Access Analysis dialog box ...................................................................................................8-16
Figure 8-15 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................8-17
Figure 8-16 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis dialog box....................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-17 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-18 Intercell Handover Analysis dialog box........................................................................................8-20
Figure 8-19 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................8-21
Figure 8-20 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box....................................................................................8-24
Figure 8-21 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box ............................................................................................8-25
Figure 8-22 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................8-27
Figure 8-23 New Cell Group dialog box ..........................................................................................................8-27
Figure 8-24 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................8-28
Figure 8-25 Cellgroup Edit dialog box.............................................................................................................8-29
Figure 8-26 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................8-30

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 8-27 Common Period Setting dialog box..............................................................................................8-30


Figure 8-28 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box......................................................................................8-31
Figure 8-29 Synchronization Report dialog box ..............................................................................................8-32
Figure 8-30 Quick Draw Setting dialog box ....................................................................................................8-33
Figure 8-31 Quick drawing ..............................................................................................................................8-34
Figure 8-32 Shortcut menu on the table ...........................................................................................................8-35
Figure 8-33 Shortcut menu on the site view.....................................................................................................8-36
Figure 8-34 Sum of a selected row...................................................................................................................8-37
Figure 8-35 Result sorting ................................................................................................................................8-38
Figure 8-36 Filtering query results ...................................................................................................................8-39
Figure 8-37 Stretching Window .......................................................................................................................8-40
Figure 8-38 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu .........................................................................................8-41
Figure 8-39 Outgoing Intercell Handover Analysis dialog box........................................................................8-42
Figure 8-40 Outgoing Cell Index Setting dialog box .......................................................................................8-43
Figure 8-41 Draw Selected Column on Map option.........................................................................................8-44
Figure 8-42 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box........................................................................8-44
Figure 8-43 Geographical display of traffic statistics.......................................................................................8-45

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Further Locating Network Problems

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

8.1 Analyzing the KPI


Performance

Types of voice performance analysis.

8.2 Analyzing the


Performance

Types of data performance analysis.

8.3 Analyzing the Cell


Accessibility

The procedure for analyzing the cell accessibility.

8.4 Analyzing the


Retainability Performance

The procedure for analyzing the call drop rate in the


DCCH or TCH.

8.5 Analyzing the Mobility


Performance

The procedures for analyzing intercell handover, outgoing


intercell handover, redundant neighbors, and missing
neighbors.

8.6 Analyzing the


Measurement Performance

The measurement performance.

8.7 Analyzing the Wireless


Resource Utility Ratio

The cell capability analysis, extra-busy cell analysis,


extra-idle cell analysis, and busy-hour traffic analysis.

8.8 Checking Parameters

The procedures for checking parameters.

8.9 Customizing the Analysis


Setting

Common settings.

8.10 Analyzing the Query


Result

Further analysis of the query result.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

8.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance


8.1.1 Analyzing BSC-Level KPI
To analyze the BSC-level KPI, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC-level KPI Analysis under the KPI Performance Analysis node in the
Trouble Shooting page.
The BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

8-2

In the Date group box, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common
Period to use the default common period set by the system.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual
z

8 Further Locating Network Problems

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 8-2 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Object tab page, select the BSCs to be queried from the BSC list.
You can select one or multiple BSCs.
Step 4 Click OK to generate the query result.
----End

8.1.2 Analyzing the BSC Overall Performance


This task is performed to analyze the indicators related to the BSC overall performance of
Huawei.
The procedure is the same with that described in section 8.1.1 "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI."

8.1.3 Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell


The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in
each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and to display the values of
KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained.
To analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat under the KPI Performance Analysis
node in the Trouble Shooting tab page, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-3

8 Further Locating Network Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

The One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box

Step 2 Select only one query condition on the Query Item tab.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab, perform the following settings:

8-4

In the Date area, select a date from the End Date drop-down list to specify the query
date, and then the system can automatically generates the begin date according to the end
date you selected. Alternatively, click Common Period to use the default common
period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2. Only
one busy time period is allowed.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-4 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 4 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.1.4 Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis


This function is performed to analyze KPIs of cell level or BSC level in a specified time, and
displays the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view.
The procedure is the same with that described in section 8.1.1 "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI."

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

8.1.5 Customizing the Cell Filter


During the Network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter out faulty cells.
To filter out faulty cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click User-defined Cell Filter under the KPI Performance Analysis node in the
Trouble Shooting page.
The User-defined Cell Filter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box

Step 2 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab, the Query Filter Condition dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 8-6.

8-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-6 Query Filter Condition dialog box

In the Query Filter Condition dialog box, you can perform the following settings:
z

Set AND or OR operator, field, condition, and limit value. Click OK, and then the
conditions are added to list.

Cick

Click Condition Check to check whether the setting is correct.

Click Clear Conditon to clear the setting.

or

to add parentheses for the logical expression.

After the setting is complete, click OK to return to the Query Item tab page.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-7. A
maximum of three time ranges can be specified.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-7

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-7 Busy Time Modify dialog box

On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network
Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of cells.

Step 4 Click OK.


The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.1.6 Analyzing the TOPN Cells


This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated
KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI.
Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs.
To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node in the Trouble
Shooting page.
The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-8.

8-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-8 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Query Item tab, perform the following settings:


1.

Select query item from the Select Query Item list.


Only one item is allowed.

2.

3.

Set the sort order.


z

If Descend is select, the query result is displayed in a descend order.

If Descend is deselected, the query result is displayed in an ascend order

Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab, and set filter conditions in the displayed
dialog box.
For details on setting filter conditions, refer to 8.1.5 Step 2.

Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-9

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems


z

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 8-9 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 4 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.1.7 Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell


The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of
multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs
for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors.
To draw the trend chart of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet of the KPI Performance Analysis node in the
Trouble Shooting page.
The Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-10.

8-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-10 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box

Step 2 On the Items tab, select three query items from the Select Query Item list.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2. A
maximum of three busy time ranges is allowed.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-11

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-11 Busy Time Modify dialog box

By default, the sytem queries the cell indicators of the whole day.

Step 4 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When
more than eight cells are available, the system queries only 8 cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.1.8 Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells


Search the worst cells using the filter conditions.
The filter conditions consist of:
z

TCH call drop occurs more than six times.

TCH traffic volume of each line is from 0.1 to 0.6.

To statistically analyze the worst cells, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Double-click Extra Bad Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node in the
Trouble Shooting page.
The Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12.

8-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-12 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-13

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-13 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs
By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When
more than eight cells are available, the system queries only eight cells.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs


8.2.1 Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)
The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in
each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and display the values of
KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained.
To know how to analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell (PS), refer to section 8.1.3
"Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell."

8.2.2 Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis (PS)


This function is performed to analyze KPIs of cell-level or BSC-level in a specified time, and
display the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view.

8-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

To know how to analyze the KPIs for a cell on an hourly basis (PS), refer to section 8.1.4
"Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis."

8.2.3 Customizing the Cell Filter (PS)


During the Network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter out problematic cells.
To know how to filter out problematic cell (PS), refer to section 8.1.5 "Customizing the Cell
Filter."

8.2.4 Analyzing TopN Cells (PS)


This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated
KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI.
Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs.
To know how to analyze TopN cells (PS), refer to section 8.1.6 "Analyzing the TOPN Cells."

8.2.5 Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)
The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of
multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs
for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors.
To know how to draw cell KPI trend chart of the KPTs for a cell (PS), refer to section 8.1.7
"Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell."

8.2.6 Analyzing the Extra Bad Cell (PS)


Search the worst cells using the filter conditions.
The filter conditions consist of:
z

TCH call drop occurs more than six times.

TCH traffic volume of each line is from 0.1 to 0.6.

To know how to statistically analyze the extra bad cells (PS), refer to section 8.1.8 "Analyzing
the Extra Bad Cells."

8.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility


This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to cell accessibility.
To analyze the cell accessibility, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Access Analysis of the Accessibility node in the Trouble Shooting page.
The Cell Access Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-14.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-15

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-14 Cell Access Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

8-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-15 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance


This function is performed to analyze the performance indicators related to call drop.
To analyze the SDCCH/TCH call drop, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis of the Retainability node in the Trouble
Shooting page.
The SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis dialog box is displayed, as show in Figure 8-16.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-17

8 Further Locating Network Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 8-16 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis dialog box

Step 2 n the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

8-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-17 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.5 Analyzing the Mobility Performance


8.5.1 Analyzing the Intercell Handover
To analyze the intercell handover, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Intercell Handover Analysis of the Mobility node in the Trouble Shooting
page.
The Intercell Handover Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-18.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-19

8 Further Locating Network Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 8-18 Intercell Handover Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 8-2.

A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

8-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-19 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.5.2 Analyzing the Outgoing Intercell Handover


This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to the outgoing intercell handover.
To know how to analyze the outgoing inter-cell handover, refer to section 8.5.1" Analyzing
the Intercell Handover."

8.5.3 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors


Redundant neighbors exist when too many neighbors for a cell are available in a Network, or
when the Network topology has changed. Redundant neighbors result in resource waste.
Suspected redundant neighbors analysis lists all the suspected redundant neighbors and
displays these suspected redundant neighbors on the map.
To know how to analyze the redundant neighbours, refer to section 8.5.1 "Analyzing the
Intercell Handover.cell group."

8.5.4 Analyzing the Missing Neighbors


This function is performed to list all the missing neighbors and display these missing
neighbors on the map.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-21

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

To know how to analyze the missing neighbors, refer to section 8.5.1 "Analyzing the Intercell
Handover.cell group."

8.5.5 Analyzing the Outgoing Intercell Handover (BSC6000)


This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to the outgoing intercell handover.
To know how to analyze the outgoing intercell handover, refer to section 8.5.1 "Analyzing the
Intercell Handover.cell group."

8.5.6 Analyzing the Redundant Neighboring Cells (BSC6000)


Redundant neighbors exist when too many neighbors for a cell are available in a Network, or
when the Network topology has changed. Redundant neighbors result in resource waste.
Suspected redundant neighbors analysis lists all the suspected redundant neighbors and
displays these suspected redundant neighbors on the map.
To know how to analyze the redundant neighboring cell (BSC6000), refer to section 8.5.1
"Analyzing the Intercell Handover.cell group."

8.5.7 Analyzing the Missing Neighboring Cells (BSC6000)


This function is performed to list all the missing neighbors and display these missing
neighbors on the map.
To know how to analyze missing neighboring cells (BSC6000), refer to section 8.5.1
"Analyzing the Intercell Handover.cell group."

8.6 Analyzing the Measurement Performance


According to full speed and half speed, the measurement performance analysis consists of the
following two analysis tasks:
z

Measurement report analysis

Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32)

Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32)

Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000)

Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000)

8.6.1 Analyzing the Measurement Report


For details about the measurement report analysis, refer to section 7.5.1 "Generating the
Measurement Report."

8.6.2 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance


The TRX level/Qual./TA/link balance analysis is performed to analyze measurement-related
performance indicators.
To analyze the TRX level /Qual./TA/link balance, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Full Rate TRX Level/Qual./TA/Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) of the TRX
Performance Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting page.

8-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

The TRX Level/Qual./TA/Link Balance Analysis dialog box is displayed.


z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified

Step 2 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 3 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
The procedures for other TRX level/qual./TA/link balance analysis are the same.with this
procedure.

8.7 Analyzing the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio


8.7.1 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell
This function is performed to analyze the traffic volume in a week for a cell or for all the cells,
and display the traffic volume in different colors to facilitate your viewing and comparison.
To analyze the daily capability of a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Daily Cell Capability Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio
Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting page.
The Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-20.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-23

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-20 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Items tab, select an appropriate Gos value from the Select One Item list.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab, select an end date from the End Date drop-down list.
Step 4 On the Objects tab, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element
or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
You can select a maximum of eight cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

On the Time Range tab, you cannot set Begin Date and Busy Time, or query the data of the whole day.

8-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

8.7.2 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells


To analyze the extra busy cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Extra Busy Cell Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis
node in the Trouble Shooting page.
The Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-21 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z

In the Date area, set Begin Date and Busy Hour. Alternatively, click Common Period
to use the default common period set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select All Day Time or Busy Time. If you select Busy Time,
you can click Modify Busy Time to specify the busy time.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-25

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Step 3 On the Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network
Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

8.7.3 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells


To know how to analyze the extral idle cells, refer to section 8.7.2 "Analyzing the Extra Busy
Cells."

8.7.4 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours


To know how to analyze the cell traffic in rush hours, refer to section 8.7.2 "Analyzing the
Extra Busy Cells."

8.8 Checking Parameters


For details about checking parameters, refer to section 4.3.6 "Checking Parameters."

8.9 Customizing the Analysis Settings


8.9.1 Managing the Cell Groups
The cell group management helps you to conveniently query the data. You can define a cell
group by selecting a set of VIC cells, or by selecting cells in an area as the statistic objects.
You can select all or some of the cells to be queried, or select cells from different groups to be
queried.

Creating a Cell Group


To create a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble Shooting
page.

8-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-22 Cell Group dialog box

Step 2 Click New.


The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-23.
Figure 8-23 New Cell Group dialog box

Step 3 In the New Cell Group dialog box, perform the following settings:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-27

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems


z

Type a name in Cell Group Name.

Type the keywords for searching. Then you can view the cell names containing the
keywords in the list. Select the cells to be added, or click Load to select all the cells.

Select the cells from the Cell Group Name list.

Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments.

Step 4 Click OK.


----End

Modifying a Cell Group


To modify a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-24.
Figure 8-24 Cell Group dialog box

Step 2 Select a cell group from the Defined Cell Group list.
Step 3 Click Modify.
The Cellgroup Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-25.

8-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-25 Cellgroup Edit dialog box

Step 4 In the Cellgroup Edit dialog box, perform the following operations:
z

Change the cell name in Cell Group Name.

Select or deselect the cells in the Cell Group Name list.

Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments.

Step 5 Click OK.


----End

Deleting a Cell Group


To delete a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble Shooting
page.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-26.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-29

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-26 Cell Group dialog box

Step 2 Select a cell group in the Defined Cell Group list.


Step 3 Click Delete.
The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation.
Step 4 Click OK.
The selected cell group is deleted from the Defined Cell Group list.
----End

8.9.2 Setting the Common Period


When you execute a performance statistics task and try to obtain the daily report, you do not
need to set the query time that can be directly retrieved from the common period setting after
the common period is set. Click Get from Database to retrieve the begin date and end date of
all the performance statistics in the database.
To set the common period, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Common Period Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble
Shooting page.
The Common Period Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27 Common Period Setting dialog box

8-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Step 2 Set Begin date and End date.


Step 3 Click OK.
----End

8.9.3 Synchronizing the Server


If a project is in server/client mode, you can import data from local cells and create a mapping
relationship between local cells and server cells.
Creating a mapping relationship provides the following functions:
z

Creating a mapping relationship between the cell data of a project and that of the cells at
the server side.

By matching keywords, creating a mapping between the engineering parameters


imported into a project, and the configuration data and traffic statistics imported in the
database.

Facilitating analyzing the result of the traffic analysis shown on the map and engineering
parameters

Displaying the result of the traffic analysis on the site view.

To create a mapping relationship between local cells and server cells, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Double-click Synch Mode Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble Shooting
page.
The Data Synchronization Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-28.
Figure 8-28 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select a mapping criterion in the field of Mapping criteria. Then Click OK.
After the mapping, the Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-29.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-31

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-29 Synchronization Report dialog box

Step 3 Click Ok.


The system prompts you to check mapping result.
Step 4 Click Output result to export the synchronization report in an *.xls file.
----End

If the engineering parameters in a project are not changed, you only need to implement the
synchronization once. If the engineering parameters are changed or re-imported, you need to
synchronize server data. If the engineering parameters are not imported and the synchronization is not
implemented, this does not affect the traffic result analysis.

8.10 Analyzing the Query Result


Double-click the task-related indicators to display the query result in the result window. After
the task executed, you can query, collect, and calculate the statistics according to the
indicators that are customized previously. The query result is displayed in the table window.
Generally, the query result consists of the following parts:
z

The first part lists common information, such as time, BSC, regions, area attributes, and
cell names.

The second part lists key indicators, such as values of various indicators gained after the
query, statistical collection, or the calculation.

The last part lists the cell ID. The cell ID is only an internal indicator for each cell in the
system. That is, the cell ID is not important for users. The cell ID, however, does play an
import role in the system. For example, the cell ID is required for functions, such as
automatic related display of site views and quick query of traffic statistics.

After traffic statistic query, the following operations are available:

8-32

Instant drawing

Exporting the query result in .xls format

Quick query of traffic statistic

Printing query result

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual
z

Controlling query result data (copy, paste and cut)

Summing up the selected area

Sorting result

Filtering data

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Except exporting to an .xls file, hiding columns, and showing columns, other control display
and re-process require more settings that will be introduced in later chapters.

8.10.1 Drawing Instantly


In addition to defining the draw setting during the pre-setting of a task, you can also use quick
drawing function after the querying the result, and display the legend for the query result.
To draw instantly, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select Quick Draw Setting on the shortcut menu.
The Quick Draw Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in the Figure 8-30.
Figure 8-30 Quick Draw Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select X-axis, Y1 axis, and Y2 axis columns in the Quick Draw Setting dialog box.
Step 3 Click Draw to start the quick drawing.
The quick drawing is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-31.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-33

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-31 Quick drawing

During quick drawing, Huawei recommends that you select multiple indicators of a cell in a distributed
period. This method is effective. If the Y-axis values of different indicators are of great discrepancy,
Huawei recommends that you select both Y1 axis and Y2 axis.

----End

8.10.2 Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File


Click

on the toolbar to export the query result in an .xls file.

8.10.3 Querying the Traffic Statistics


After a task is queried, you can select some problematic cells in the window of the query
result to perform quick query of the traffic statistics. For example, select two cells. Then,
choose Statistic Query > Query selected cell indices trend on the shortcut menu. An instant
and direct query of the trend for the selected cells is available. This function supports
querying a maximum of eight cells at a time.

8-34

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Besides performing quick query of the traffic statistics in the result table, you can also select
some problematic cells on the site view to perform quick query of the traffic statistics, as
shown in Figure 8-32 and Figure 8-33.
Figure 8-32 Shortcut menu on the table

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-35

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-33 Shortcut menu on the site view

8.10.4 Printing the Query Results


If a printer is available, you can print all of the query results.
To print the query results, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

to export data to an .xls file.

Step 2 Open the *.xls file to print the results.


----End

8.10.5 Controlling the Query Result Data


Controlling query result data involves the following operations:
z

Coping data

Pasting data

Cutting data

You can copy, paste, or cut data in result sheet. These operations are similar to those in the
Microsoft Windows.

8-36

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

8.10.6 Summing Up the Selected Area


We can sum up the result of a row or a line. Firstly, select an area to be summed up and click
. The system automatically sums up values of the selected area. For example, the sum of
the counter for TCH overflow (including switching) can be found in line 262, as shown in
Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34 Sum of a selected row

8.10.7 Sorting the Results


By default, the task query result is ranged by the column header of the common information.
The common information includes the following fields:
z

Vendor

BSC

Regions

Terrain attributes

Cell names

Time

To sort the query results, perform the following steps:

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-37

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Step 1 Select an area that requires the sum.


Step 2 Click

or

to re-sort the query result.

Step 3 Click common information, for example, TCH Call Drop Rates.
The query result is sorted by TCH Call Drop Rates, as shown in Figure 8-35.
Figure 8-35 Result sorting

----End

8.10.8 Filtering the Query Results


You can filter the query results to display the data that you are concerned with. This function
is helpful when there are huge amounts of query data.
To filter the query results, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

8-38

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

A drop-down list is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-36.


Figure 8-36 Filtering query results

Step 2 Click the arrow of the drop-down list to select or deselect the items from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click

again to exit the filter.

The system shows all the data.


----End

8.10.9 Tiling the Window


You can tile the window horizontally or vertically to facilitate your viewing and comparison.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-39

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems


z

Select Tile Horizontal on the shortcut menu to tile the current window horizontal with
the Drawing window, as shown in Figure 8-37.

Select Tile Vertical on the shortcut menu to tile the current window vertical with the
Drawing window.

Figure 8-37 Stretching Window

8.10.10 Creating a Cell Group


To create a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a row or multiple rows in the table.
Step 2 Select New Cell Group on the shortcut menu of the selected rows, as shown in Figure 8-38.

8-40

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

Figure 8-38 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu

A cell group is displayed. The selected rows are added to the new cell group.
----End

8.10.11 Setting the Geographical Display for Traffic Statistics


This task is performed to set display intervals and related colors to be displayed on the map.
For example, if the data is in an interval, the related cell on the map is colorized when this
function is implemented.
This template lists the specified indicators of a specified cell in a period in an ascending or
descending order. This template facilitates your review of the TopN cells with a specified
indicator.
Take the cell KPI weekly trend task for example. To set the geographical display for traffic
statistic, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click Draw Selected Column on Map on a column heading in the result report, as
shown in Figure 8-41.
The Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-42.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-41

8 Further Locating Network Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figure 8-39 Draw Selected Column on Map option

Figure 8-40 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box

Step 2 In the area of Color Setting, select Automatically or Manually.


z

If Automatically is selected, set Start color and End color.

If Manually is selected, set color for each interval by double-clicking the color unit in
the grid.

Step 3 Click Add or Delete to add or remove ranges in the Range setting list. Alternatively select a
value in the Set range number to set range number.

8-42

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

8 Further Locating Network Problems

You can give description of each range in the description area of the grid. If you leave it blank,
the system automatically gives descriptions according to value of each range.
Step 4 In Set Min and Max group, select the options according to your requirements.
z

If Manually is selected, set min and max value for each grid.

If Obtain automatically is selected, the system gets min and max value from the OWC
report sheet.

If customize is selected, you need to input only min and max values.

Step 5 Select range type in the area of Range type and select sort type in the area of Sort type.
Step 6 Click OK.
The result is displayed on map, as shown in Figure 8-43.
Figure 8-41 Geographical display of traffic statistics

----End

When executing this operation in the query result, you may find that the data of a cell is more than
previous one. Also the Having same cell data row message box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-43

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
9 FAQ ...............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 SQL Server and the Stand-Alone Version .....................................................................................................9-3
9.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Nastar of Old Version .........................................................................9-3
9.3 Obtaining the Data from the Old Version......................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1 Using the Neighboring Cell Relation Data of Older Versions..............................................................9-4
9.3.2 Using Project Parameters .....................................................................................................................9-6
9.4 Problems Caused by Expired License ...........................................................................................................9-9
9.5 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters ....................................9-12
9.6 The Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify) .....................................................................................................9-13
9.7 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighboring Cells........................................................................................9-13
9.8 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations .....................................9-14
9.9 From Tab File to Map File ..........................................................................................................................9-16
9.10 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the New
Version?.............................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.11 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started after the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.2 Hard Dongle
Version?.............................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.12 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.22 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Nastar GSM Version
2.21?..................................................................................................................................................................9-18
9.13 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?.......................................................................................9-18
9.14 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported? ...................................................................................9-18
9.15 Why Cannot a Task be Run? .....................................................................................................................9-18
9.16 Language of Task Tree ..............................................................................................................................9-19
9.17 Icon for Antenna Being Incorrect On the Map ..........................................................................................9-19
9.18 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed?.............................................................9-19
9.19 Begin time and End time in the Network Monitoring Report ...................................................................9-19
9.20 Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Network Monitoring Report .......................................9-20
9.21 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM ....................................................................9-20
9.22 Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Optimization Analysis ..................................................9-22
9.23 What Problems Will Occur If the Project Parameters are not Consistent with the Configuration Parameters?
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-22
9.24 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is not Consistent with That of the Frequency Optimization
Check ................................................................................................................................................................9-22
9.25 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in Network Monitoring Report........................9-23

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figures

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Figures
Figure 9-1 Export Neighbors option...................................................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-2 Export Neighbors dialog box............................................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Neighbor Analysis menu...................................................................................................................9-5
Figure 9-4 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ........................................................9-5
Figure 9-5 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box ....................................................9-6
Figure 9-6 Output dialog box .............................................................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-7 Open dialog box................................................................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-8 Select Table dialog box.....................................................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-9 Import Setup dialog box ...................................................................................................................9-9
Figure 9-10 License Error dialog box...............................................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-11 Open dialog box............................................................................................................................ 9-11
Figure 9-12 Co-channel and adjacent channel check .......................................................................................9-14
Figure 9-13 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check ...........................................................9-15
Figure 9-14 Site View.......................................................................................................................................9-16

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Tables

Tables
Table 9-1 Handover success rate ......................................................................................................................9-20
Table 9-2 Calculation formula of non-original .................................................................................................9-23

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

FAQ

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

9.1 SQL Server and the Stand-Alone


Version

The recommended server by Huawei.

9.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the


Nastar of Old Version

Problems and solutions for uninstalling the


Nastar of old version.

9.3 Obtaining the Data from the Old


Version

Problems and solutions for obtaining the data


from the old version.

9.4 Problems Caused by Expired License

Problems and solutions for expired licenses.

9.5 FAQs Concerning the Comparison,


Backup, and Recovery of Project
Parameters

Problems and solutions concerning the


comparison, backup, and recovery of project
parameters.

9.6 The Meaning of Each CI (Cell


Identify)

The problem and solution for how to identify


the meaning of each CI.

9.7 Selected Cells Lack Relevant


Neighboring Cells

The problem and solution for the selected


cells that lack relevant neighboring cells.

9.8 Switching Between Network


Optimization Operations and Common
Operations

The problem and solution for the switching


between Network optimization operations and
common operations.

9.9 From Tab File to Map File

The problem and solution for converting the


Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is
available to MapX.

9.10 How to Upgrade Performance


Statistics Query Task in the Old Database
After the Installation of the New Version?

Problem and solution for upgrading


performance statistics query task in the old
database after the installation of the new
version.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

9-2

Section

Describes

9.11 Why Cannot the Program Be


Correctly Started after the Installation of
the Nastar GSM2.2 Hard Dongle Version?

The problem and solution for the exceptional


case when starting the program after
installing the Nastar GSM2.2 Hard Gongle
Version.

9.12 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version


2.22 to Analyze the Results Imported by
the Nastar GSM Version 2.21?

The problem and solution for using the Nastar


GSM Version 2.22 to analyze the results
imported by the Nastar GSM Version 2.21.

9.13 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly


Installed?

The problem and solution for correctly


installing the MSDE.

9.14 Why Cannot the Project Parameters


Be Exported?

The problem and solution for exporting the


project parameters.

9.15 Why Cannot a Task be Run?

The problem and solution for running a task.

9.16 Language of Task Tree

The solution for the problem of "Why the


language of the task tree does not agree with
that of the main program".

9.17 Icon for Antenna Being Incorrect On


the Map

The problem and solution for the incorrect


display of icons for antenna on the map.

9.18 Why Cannot the Workspace or


Property Window Be Displayed?

The problem and solution for not displaying


the workspace or property window.

9.19 Begin time and End time in the


Network Monitoring Report

On what begin time and end time in the


Network monitoring report stand for.

9.20 Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End


Date in the Network Monitoring Report

On what statistic begin date and statistic end


date in the Network monitoring report stand
for.

9.21 Implications of the Handover


Indicators in the Nastar GSM

Explanations on the implications of the


handover indicators in the Nastar GSM.

9.22 Data Source for Channel Analysis


and Network Optimization Analysis

The relation between project parameters and


channel and Network optimization analysis.

9.23 What Problems Will Occur If the


Project Parameters are not Consistent with
the Configuration Parameters?

The impact when the project parameters are


not consistent with the configuration
parameters.

9.24 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality


Check is not Consistent with That of the
Frequency Optimization Check

The impact when RNP parameter rationality


check is not consistent with that of the
frequency optimization check.

9.25 Description of the Calculation


Formula of Non-Original in Network
Monitoring Report.

The calculation formula of non-original in


Network monitoring report.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

9.1 SQL Server and the Stand-Alone Version


The SQL Server requires higher system configuration and occupies more system resource
than the MSDE. Huawei recommends that you install the MSDE rather than the SQL Server,
for the MSDE is enough for the stand-alone version.

9.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Nastar of Old


Version
z

Problem:
If you have installed both the Nastar GSM2.4 and the Nastar GSM old versions, the
MapX component fails to work correctly after you uninstall the Nastar GSM old versions,
thus causing many unexpected mistakes.

Solution:
Switching between versions can solve this problem.
To solve this problem, performing the following steps:

Step 1 Open Add or Delete Programs on the Windows Control Panel.


Step 2 Remove the program GENEX Nastar GSM (old and new versions) from the Add or Delete
Programs window.
Step 3 Remove the program GENEX Shared.
Step 4 Reinstall the Nastar GSM 2.0 (old version).
Step 5 Then, uninstall the Nastar GSM 2.0 (old version) safely.
Step 6 Re-install the Nastar GSM 2.2 (new version).
The system prompts you to install GENEX Shared components package (including MapX,
Teechart, OWC, MDAC2.7 and Sentinel Lock Driver), and also install the GENEX Shared.
----End

9.3 Obtaining the Data from the Old Version


z

Problem:
Sometimes, the on-site engineers need to use the data from the Nastar GSM of the old
version. Since the database structure of the new version has changed, you cannot directly
use the original data resource in *.mdb files.

Solution:
You should first export the important data of the original database to an .xls file. Then
use the data import function provided by the Nastar GSM to import the backup file to the
database of the new version.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-3

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

9.3.1 Using the Neighboring Cell Relation Data of Older Versions


To obtain the data of neighboring cell relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the software of old version.
Step 2 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Export Neighbors option

The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-2.


Figure 9-2 Export Neighbors dialog box

Step 3 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the area of Export Format.


Step 4 Select one or multi items to be displayed: Cell name, LAC, CI, BCCH, and BSIC.
Step 5 Click OK to export the Adjacent Relation Table and save it in an .xls file.
Step 6 Open the software of new version.

9-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

Step 7 Select neighbors file.


z

Import the neighbors file in horizontal format.

Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format >
Horizontal, as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Neighbor Analysis menu

The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box

Import the neighbors file in vertical format.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Click Open.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors Files > Standard Format >
Vertical.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-5

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

The Please choose upright adjacence relation file to import dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box

Click Open.

----End

The format of the neighboring cell relation imported in the new version must be consistent with that
exported in the older version. For example, if the neighboring cell relation is exported in the horizontal
format, then you should import it in the horizontal format.

9.3.2 Using Project Parameters


To use project parameters of old versions, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the software of the old version.
Step 2 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-6.

9-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

Figure 9-6 Output dialog box

Step 3 In the Output dialog box, select the parameters to be exported.


Step 4 Click OK to export the project parameter of the current project.
Step 5 Open the software of new version.
Step 6 Choose Project >Import Project Parameters.
The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-7.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-7

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

Figure 9-7 Open dialog box

Step 7 Select the project parameter table file and click Open.
The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Select Table dialog box

Step 8 Select the project parameter table to be imported and click OK.
The Import Setup dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-9.

9-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

Figure 9-9 Import Setup dialog box

----End

9.4 Problems Caused by Expired License


z

Question 1:
My hard dongle has expired. How can I update it?

Answer:
Update the license to solve this problem. To do this, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Open the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-10.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-9

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

Figure 9-10 License Error dialog box

Step 2 Click Update.


The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-11.

9-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

Figure 9-11 Open dialog box

Step 3 Select the license file, and click Open.


Step 4 Click OK to complete copying the license.
Step 5 Restart the GENEX Nastar GSM.
----End
z

Question 2:
How to obtain a soft license on line?

Answer:
To obtain the soft license on line, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Send ESN code to Huawei.


After obtaining the ESN code, Huawei sends the license file to you.
Step 2 Click Update in the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-10.
Step 3 Select the license obtained from Huawei.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-11

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

9.5 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and


Recovery of Project Parameters
Project Parameters
z

Question:

When to back up the project parameters?

Which of two backups of the project parameters to be compared?

What operations are involved when you want to discard the modification of the
project parameters?

Answer:

When the project parameters are imported for the last time, the system makes a
backup for the project parameter and saves the backup in the database.

When you use the Project parameter Comparative Display function, the system
compares the current project parameter table with the last imported one and lists all
addition, deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to
an .xls file.

When you use the function of Cancel Project parameter Modification, the system
returns to the project parameter table that is latest imported. Note that the Cancel
Project parameter Modification function can disable all addition, deletion, and
modification.

Configured Neighboring Cell Relation


z

Question:

When to back up the configured neighboring cell relation?

Which two project parameter tables are compared by the Project Parameter
Comparative Display function?

What operations are involved when you want to discard the modification of
configured neighboring cell relation?

Answer:

When the neighboring cell configuration is imported for the last time, the system
makes a backup and saves the backup in the database.

When you use the Project parameter Comparative Display function, the Nastar
GSM compares the current neighboring cell configuration table with the last imported
one and lists all addition, deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM
exports them to an .xls file.

When you use the function of Cancel Project parameter Modification, the system
returns to the backup neighboring cell configuration table imported for the last time.
Note that the Cancel Project parameter Modification function can disable all
addition and deletion operations.

Planned Neighboring Cell Relation


z

9-12

Question:

When to back up the planned neighboring cell relation?

Which of two backups of configured neighboring cells for comparison?

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

What operations are involved when you want to discard the modification of the
project parameters?

Answer:

When the neighboring cell planning is generated for the last time, the system makes a
backup and saves the backup in the database.

When you use the Project Parameter Comparative Display function, the system
compares the current neighboring cell planning table with the one generated in the
last planning, and lists all addition and deletion records. Then, the Nastar GSM
exports them to an .xls file.

When you use the function of Cancel Project parameter Modification function, the
system returns to the neighboring cell table generated during the last planning. Note
that the Cancel Project parameter Modification function can disable all addition
and deletion operations.

9.6 The Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify)


z

Question:
How to identify meanings of cell symbols "B", "T", and "B-T" and "T-T' in the
co-channel and adjacent channel check of the cell?

Answer:
For details, refer to section 5.1.1 "Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel."
If BCCH and TCH both are selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box,
the system marks B, T, B-T and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel.
The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:

B-T: compares the values of BCCH and TCH with those of the current ARFCN. The
values of TCH indicate the lower (upper) adjacent channel of current ARFCN, while
the values of BCCH indicate upper (down) adjacent channel of current ARFCN.

T-T: compares the values of TCH between this cell and this ARFCN. Meanwhile the
values of upper and down adjacent channels are available. The values of the BCCH
indicate that it is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN.

B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (lower) adjacent channel and
the TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN.

T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the upper adjacent channel of
current ARFCN. The BCCH value indicates that it is neither adjacent to nor equal to
current ARFCN.

9.7 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighboring Cells


z

Question:
Why there are no corresponding neighboring cells of the selected cells on the map after
neighboring cell configuration is imported?

Answer:
The following two reasons may cause the problem.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

The current working layer is on the automatic neighborhood planning. Click


switch to the neighborhood configuration layer.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

to

9-13

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

When the neighborhood is imported, the system enables the unique matching based
on LAC+CI. Ensure that the imported project parameters of the adjacent cell include
LAC+CI data. And the LAC+CI data has a unique neighboring cell relation.

9.8 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations


and Common Operations
z

Question:
When you conduct the Network optimization analysis, a map is displayed on the site
view, as shown in Figure 9-12.

Figure 9-12 Co-channel and adjacent channel check

At this time, the pointer of the mouse is a cross, indicating that network optimization
operation is undergone. In this case, the co-channel and adjacent channel check is being
conducted.

9-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

If you need to check other parts of the map, you have to zooming in, zooming out or
moving operation, as shown in Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check

If you want to continue the Network optimization before executing the map operations,
what should be done?
z

Answer:
After executing the map operations, right-click on the site view. The shortcut menu is
displayed.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Click Continue Network Optimization Operation to continue the Network


optimization analysis.

Click Exit Current Operation to exit the Network optimization analysis.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-15

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

Figure 9-14 Site View

9.9 From Tab File to Map File


z

Question:
How to convert the Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX?

Answer:
To convert Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX, perform the
following steps:

Step 1 Find the path of MapX Common. For example, C:\Program Files\Common Files\MapInfo
Shared\MapX Common.
Step 2 Run GeosetManager50.exe.
Step 3 Create a map GeoSet.
Step 4 Add the existing tab file and import the GeoSet map file.
Step 5 Save the map file and the transformation is over.
----End

9-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

9.10 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in


the Old Database After the Installation of the New
Version?
z

Question:
After you install a new Nastar GSM version, the main program has been upgraded
successfully. If the Nastar GSM is connected to the old database, the performance
statistics query task, however, is still old. How to update the performance statistics query
task of the old database?

Answer:
After installation of the new version, connect the Nastar GSM to the local Network and
run new performance statistics query tasks, if you have created a new local Network by
TransData.

If you want to upgrade these tasks in an old local Network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a local Network to be upgraded in the TransData workspace.
Step 2 Open the NET menu, and click Initial Task. Alternatively, right-click the blank area and
click Initial Task to initialize the tasks.
After initialization, the performance statistics query tasks have been cleared in the selected
local Network, and been updated into the new version.
----End

9.11 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started after


the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.2 Hard Dongle
Version?
z

Question:
The Nastar GSM2.2 Hard Dongle Version is installed and a new hard dongle is plugged
in the parallel port. When starting the program, the system gives a message that the hard
dongle is not found yet, and the start fails.

Answer:
The problem listed previously is caused by the confliction between the new version and
the old one. To handle this problem, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Install the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.2.


Step 2 On Control Panel, remove the installed the Nastar GSM2.2.
Step 3 Restart your system.
Step 4 Reinstall the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.2.
----End

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-17

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

9.12 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.22 to Analyze


the Results Imported by the Nastar GSM Version 2.21?
z

Question:
When you use the new version (version 2.2) to analyze the results imported by the old
one (version 2.2), the interfaces of old version are displayed. How to update these
interfaces?

Answer:
You need to update tasks. To update tasks, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Start TransData, and then select the database NET node connected currently.
Step 2 Select Initial Task on the shortcut menu.
Back up the user-defined tasks before refreshing the task node.

After the tasks are refreshed, the interfaces of the new version are displayed.
----End

9.13 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?


z

Question:
Why cannot the MSDE be installed correctly?

Answer:
Firstly, check whether an MSDE instance is installed with the same name as the one you
have installed before.
If an MSDE is installed, uninstall the MSDE and delete all instance files in the SQL
Server folder (C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\), and then reinstall the MSDE
If you have not installed an MSDE, you can infer that the problem may be caused by the
confliction between the MSDE and the SQL Server. Therefore you can uninstall the SQL
Server firstly, and then reinstall the MSDE.

9.14 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported?


z

Question:
Why cannot the project parameters be exported? The alert commands cannot be executed.
And the application is out of date.

Answer:
Check whether Microsoft Office Excel is overdue. If Microsoft Office Excel is overdue,
activate or reinstall Microsoft Office excel.

9.15 Why Cannot a Task be Run?


z

9-18

Question:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

Why running a task fails? No information on VIC cells is displayed.


z

Answer:
Error occurs when the Nastar GSM is connected to database. Re-open the Nastar GSM.

9.16 Language of Task Tree


z

Question:
The language of the task tree does not agree with that of the main program.

Answer:
If the problem described previously occurred, you can infer that the languages in the
Nastar GSM version and the Transdata version does not match. Use the right version of
the Transdata and initialize the task.

9.17 Icon for Antenna Being Incorrect On the Map


z

Question:
The icon for antenna shown on the map is incorrect.

Answer:
The font file is not installed correctly. Please reinstall the font file.

9.18 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be


Displayed?
z

Question:
The workspace or Property window is not displayed, though you have clicked the
relevant menu.

Answer:
Check whether the workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border. If the
workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border, drag it back.

9.19 Begin time and End time in the Network Monitoring


Report
z

Question:
What do Begin time and End time in the Network monitoring report stand for?

Answer:
The source data has a range for date. The begin date and end date clearly mark this
range.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-19

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

9.20 Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the


Network Monitoring Report
z

Question:
What do Statistic begin date and Statistic end date in the Network monitoring report
stand for?

Answer:
When you export a report, you need to know the date range. The begin date and end date
mark this. Ensure that the end date is later than the begin date.

9.21 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar


GSM
z

Question:
Would you like to explain the implications of the handover indicators in the Nastar GSM,
since so many indicators are available?

Answer:
The calculation for handover indicators is relatively complex. The following table lists
the handover success rates at the BSC level.

Table 9-1 Handover success rate


Item

Description

Level

Handover
Success Rate
(%)

([2265 Successful intra-cell


handovers]+[2239 Successful
incoming internal inter-cell
handovers]+[2240 Successful
incoming inter BSC inter-cell
handovers])

Summed up at the cell level

/([2264 Attempted intracell


handovers]+[2201 Attempted
incoming inter BSC inter-cell
handovers]+[2200 Incoming internal
inter-cell handovers])
Intra-BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[2239 Successful incoming internal


inter cell handovers + 2243
Successful outgoing internal inter-cell
handovers + 2265 Successful
intra-cell handovers]

Summed up at the cell level

/[2199 Attempted incoming internal


inter-cell handovers + 2204
Attempted outgoing internal inter-cell
handovers + 2264 Attempted
intra-cell handovers]

9-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

Item

Description

Level

OutgoingBSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 2244 Successful outgoing inter-BSC


inter-cell handovers

Summed up at the cell level

IncomingBSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 2240 Successful incoming


inter-BSC inter-cell handovers

900->1800
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 55 Successful intercell handovers


(900/850->1800/1900) + 69
Successful incoming BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 94
Successful outgoing BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900)]
/[ 52 Attempted intercell handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 64
Attempted incoming BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 89
Attempted outgoing BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900)]

The corresponding indicators at


the cell level are unavailable.

1800->900
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 56 Successful intercell handovers


(1800/1900->900/850) + 70
Successful incoming BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 95
Successful outgoing BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850)]
/[ 53 Attempted intercell handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 65
Attempted incoming BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 90
Attempted outgoing BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850)]

The corresponding indicators at


the cell level are not available.

/ 2206 Attempted outgoing inter-BSC


inter-cell handovers] * 100%
Summed up at the cell level

/ 2201 Attempted incoming inter-BSC


inter-cell handovers] * 100%

Obtain them from the BSC


overall performance
measurement.

Obtain them from the BSC


overall performance
measurement.

The handover success rate at the BSC level serves as reference for the BSC overall handover. In general,
the analyses on intra BSC handover success rate, outgoing BSC handover success rate, and incoming
BSC handover success rate are enough.
The result of handover success rate summed up at the BSC level in the performance analysis is
inaccurate, because the intra BSC handover success rate sums up the handovers from cells, as well as the
handovers to cells and intra-cell handover. The handover success rate at the BSC level in the KPI
analysis sums up the intra-cell handovers and the handovers to the cell.
In case of exceptional handover success rate, check whether the detailed indicators are registered
completely.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-21

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

9.22 Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network


Optimization Analysis
The function of the channel analysis and Network optimization analysis are based on project
parameters.
If the project parameters are not updated, the channel analysis and Network optimization
analysis are based on the previous data of project parameters.

9.23 What Problems Will Occur If the Project Parameters


are not Consistent with the Configuration Parameters?
z

Question:
What problems will occur if project parameters are not consistent with configuration
parameters?

Answer:
The neighboring cell relation is related to the configuration parameters.
After the project parameters are imported, the configuration data fails to be imported, if
the configuration data from the database is not consistent with the project parameter.
During the download of the configuration data, the configuration data fails to be
downloaded, if the configuration data in the Server is not consistent with the project
parameters.
If the configuration data fails to be imported or downloaded, and the software never
succeeds in importing or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration
information (such as neighboring cell relation) is null. If the software succeeded in
importing or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration in the
program stays in the previous state. That may affect the accuracy of the analysis result
generated by the Neighbors Analysis function.

9.24 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is not


Consistent with That of the Frequency Optimization
Check
z

Question:
Why the result of RNP parameter rationality check is not consistent with that of
frequency optimization check?

Answer:

The check range is different.


The function of RNP parameters rationality check is to check the co-BCCH co-BSIC.
The function of frequency optimization check is to check co-BCCH co-BSIC and
co-TCH co-BSIC of the current cell

The query object is different.


The function of RNP parameters rationality check is to check the configuration data
imported from the server.

9-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

9 FAQ

The function of frequency optimization check is to check the configuration data of


the local.

The LAC and IC of project parameter in the local cannot match with that in the server
database. Therefore, the configuration data of the two functions is different and the
check result is different.

9.25 Description of the Calculation Formula of


Non-Original in Network Monitoring Report.
Table 9-2describes the calculation formula of non-original in Network monitoring report.
Table 9-2 Calculation formula of non-original
Name

ID

Target Expressions

Immediate assignment
failure

T2185 T2186

Total immediate assignment requests


Total successful immediate assignments

Immediate assignment
failure for location
update

T7283 T2187

Attempted channel seizures for location


update Total successful immediate
assignments for location update

Immediate assignment
failure for MTC

T7281 T2191

Attempted channel seizures for MTC


Total successful immediate assignments
for MTC

Immediate assignment
failure for emergency
call

T7279 T2193

Attempted channel seizures for


emergency call Total successful
immediate assignments for emergency
call

Immediate assignment
failure for
re-establishment

T7280 T2194

Attempted channel seizures for


re-establishment Total successful
immediate assignments for
re-establishment

Immediate assignment
failure (Other process)

[T7282] [T2195]
[T2189]

Attempted channel seizures for MOC


successful immediate assignments for
other procedures Successful
immediate assignments for MOC

Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers (MS
reported: Abnormal
release, unspecified)

T7198 +T7200
+T7199 +T7197
+T7205 +T7203
+T7210 +T7204
+T7202 +T7207
+T7208 +T7209
+T7211 +T7213
+T7201 +T7212
+T7206

Sum of all MS reported: Abnormal


release, unspecified

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-23

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

9 FAQ

Name

ID

Target Expressions

Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers(HANDOV
ER REQUIRED
REJECT)

T7222 + T7227 +
T7225 + T7219 +
T7223 + T7229 +
T7220 + T7218 +
T7231 + T7230 +
T7226 + T7221 +
T7224 + T7228

Sum of all HANDOVER REQUIRED


REJECT

Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers(CLEAR
COMMAND take
reason)

T7241 + T7243 +
T7240 + T7245 +
T7242 + T7244 +
T7239 + T7238

Sum of all CLEAR COMMAND take


reason

TCH Call Drop Rate


(excluding
handovers)(%)

(T2142)/(T2105T210
3T2112T2113)

TCH Call Drop/TCH Assignment


Success Successful TCH seizures for
intra-cell handover Successful TCH
seizures for intra-BSC incoming cell
handover Successful TCH seizures for
inter-BSC incoming cell handover

9.26 Failing to Transmit All the Traffic Collection Tasks


The uploaded tasks can comprise only the traffic collection tasks with the periods as 60
minutes or a multiple of 60 minutes. Otherwise, the tasks are transmitted in disorder by the
NAConvert, thus resulting in a failure to transmit some traffic collection tasks. For details,
refer to chapter 3 "Resetting Tasks for Data Collection."

9.27 Reducing the Impact of the NAConvert on the BAM


Performance
The NAConvert affects the performance of the BAM to some extent when the CPU usage
ratio is high. When you perform operations such as data setting and modification, system
timeout may occur. To handle this problem and reduce the impact of the NAconvert on the
BAM performance, take the following workaround measures:

9-24

Generally, the NAConvert consumes 57 minutes upon startup. During this period, do
not perform any operations.

Do not update traffic collection tasks or manually perform any operations on the
NAConvert. These operations may trigger the automatic update of the NAConvert,
which results in the high usage ratio of the CPU. The high usage ratio of the CPU can
last for 57 minutes. Therefore, perform the operations on the NAConvert as few as
possible.

If you plan to refresh the related tables in the BAM to a large extent, perform this
operation during the period of low CPU usage ratio.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual
z

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

9 FAQ

Generally, system timeout occurs during the first operation. It does not occur during later
operations. If system timeout occurs frequently, close the NAConvert and then perform
operations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-25

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

Contents

Contents
A Engineering Parameters......................................................................................................... A-1
B Shortcut Keys ............................................................................................................................B-1
C Abbreviations............................................................................................................................C-1

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Tables

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

Tables
Table A-1 Project parameters.............................................................................................................................A-1
Table B-1 Shortcut keys..................................................................................................................................... B-1
Table C-1 Abbreviations.................................................................................................................................... C-1

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

A Engineering Parameters

Engineering Parameters

Table A-1 describes the engineering parameters.


Table A-1 Project parameters
Name

Implication

MSCNAMEMSCNAME

Name of MSC

BSCNAMEBSCNAME

Name of BSC

SITENAMESITENAME

Name of BTS

LONGITUDELONGITUDE

Longitude of the BTS position, in the form of Degree or


Minute or Second or decimal (mandatory).

LATITUDE

Latitude of the BTS position, in the form of Degree or


Minute or Second or decimal (mandatory).

SITETYPESITETYPE

BTS types, including macro 1800 directional, macro


1800 omni, macro 900 directional, macro 900 omni,
micro 1800 or micro 900. Macro means macro BTSs.
Micro means micro cells. 1800 and 900 mean sites of
1800M and 900M respectively. Directional means
directional BTS and omni means omni BTS.

CELLNAMECELLNAME

Name of the cell

LACLAC

LAC number, at most five digits.

CICI

CI number, at most five digits.

BCCHBCCH

BCCH value

BSICBSIC

BSIC value, two digits with each digit between 0 and 7.

HSNHSN

Fill in corresponding number.

MAMA

MAMA

HOPPINGHOPPING

Whether there is hopping. Fill in TRUE or FALSE.

GPRSGPRS

Whether it is GPRS cell. Fill in TRUE or FALSE.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

A-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

A Engineering Parameters

A-2

Name

Implication

POWERLEVELPOWERLEVEL

Antenna power

ANT_HEIGHTANT_HEIGHT

Antenna Height (number)

AZIMUTHAZIMUTH

Orientation, unit: degree (mandatory)

DOWNTILTDOWNTILT

Declination angle, unit: degree

ANT_NAMEANT_NAME

Antenna name

ANTGAINANTGAIN

Antenna gain

REGIONREGION

Region attribute of the cell, used in performance data

SUPPLYSUPPLY

Equipment supplier name

REGIONPROPREGIONPROP

Region attribute of the cell, used in performance data

USERDEF1USERDEF1

User-defined attribute 1

USERDEF2USERDEF2

User-defined attribute 2

USERDEF3USERDEF3

User-defined attribute 3

USERDEF4USERDEF4

User-defined attribute 4

USERDEF5USERDEF5

User-defined attribute 5

USERDEF6USERDEF6

User-defined attribute 6

USERDEF7USERDEF7

User-defined attribute 7

USERDEF8USERDEF8

User-defined attribute 8

USERDEF9USERDEF9

User-defined attribute 9

USERDEF10USERDEF10

User-defined attribute 10

PLANPROPPLANPROP

Planning attribute, used in automatic planning of


adjacent cells. Fill in downtown area, suburb or villages
and towns.

TCHTCH

TCH value. Multiple values should be separated by


semicolon.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

B Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Keys

During the co-channel and adjacent channel check, you can use shortcut keys to check
different frequency. Table B-1 describes the function of the shortcut keys.
Table B-1 Shortcut keys
Shortcut Keys

Description

Ctrl + O

Opens an existing project.

Ctrl + I

Imports a engineering parameter file.

Ctrl + Shift + I

Exports a engineering parameter file.

Ctrl + P

Imports a configuration parameter (Huawei as default).

Ctrl + Shift + P

Exports a configuration parameter (Huawei as default).

Ctrl + W

Closes the current screen (such as report and figure).

Ctrl + 1

Displays the daily report execution window.

Ctrl + 2

Displays the monthly report execution window.

Ctrl + 3

Displays the weekly report execution window.

Ctrl + 4

Displays the semi-monthly report execution window.

Ctrl + 5

Displays the health check report window.

Ctrl + 6

Displays the Network monitoring report window.

Ctrl + 7

Displays the quality evaluation report window.

Ctrl + 8

Displays the expanding capacity report window.

F10

Switches Workspace window.

F9

Switches Property window.

F8

Switches site Navigator window.

F7

Switches Legend window.

Ctrl + D

Switches between layer 1800 and 900.

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

B-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

B Shortcut Keys

B-2

Shortcut Keys

Description

Ctrl + Q

Switches between simulation neighbor and configuration neighbor.

Ctrl + F

Searches for a cell.

Ctrl + B

Displays the romanced engineering parameter setting window.

Ctrl + G

Switches to distance measuring window.

Ctrl + K

Switches grid effect.

Ctrl + E

Displays neighbors.

Shift + left click

In the status of neighbor displayed, press Shift, and click a cell to add
unidirectional neighbor.

Ctrl + left click

In the status of neighbor displayed, press Ctrl, and click a cell to add
bidirectional neighbor (not selected as precondition).

Ctrl + left click

In the status of neighbor displayed, press Ctrl, and click a cell to


deleted neighbor (Selected as precondition).

Ctrl + V

Checks co-channel by cell.

Ctrl + C

Checks co-channel by frequency.

Ctrl + X

Searches cell by co-channel and co BSIC.

Ctrl + R

Searches idle frequency.

Ctrl + T

Checks spectrum efficiency.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data Analysis


User Manual

C Abbreviations

Abbreviations

Table C-1 describes the full name of each abbreviation.


Table C-1 Abbreviations
Abbreviation

Full name

BCC

BTS Color Code

BCCH

Broadcast Control Channel

BSC

Base Station Controller

BSIC

Base Station Identity Code

BSS

Base Station Subsystem

CI

Cell Identity

CPU

Center Processing Unit

CSV

Comma Separation Value

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

GByte

Gigabyte

GHz

Gigahertz

GSM

Global System for Mobile communications

HA

High Availability

ID

Identity

IP

Internet Protocol

KPI

Key Performance Index

LAC

Location Area Code

MS

Mobile Station

MSC

Mobile Service Switching Center

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-1

GENEX Nastar GSM Wireless Performance Data


Analysis
User Manual

C Abbreviations

C-2

Abbreviation

Full name

MB

Megabyte

NCC

Network Color Code

OMC

Operation and Maintenance Center

PC

Personal Computer

SDCCH

Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel

TA

Timing Advance

TCH

Traffic Channel

TCP

Transport Control Protocol

TRX

Transceiver

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-04-30)